Home

MT Programming Manual

1. 97 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R1 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at R1 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic L1 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true Configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt assignment J R1 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at 0 LI R2 Assignment Identical to R1 see page 97 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging conta
2. MT Series Motor Cable cross section Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Unshielded GORSE cable Shielded GORSE cable Type 7 RN F 4Gxx Type GVCSTV LS LH kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 MT401 0 75 1 15 14 109 36 yd 76 55 49 21 114 83 92 96 yd 71 08 yd MT402 1 5 2 15 14 109 36 yd 76 55 49 21 yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd MT403 2 2 3 189 14 120 30yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd 405 4 5 15 14 120 30 yd 71 08 49 21 yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd MT407 5 5 7 5 25 14 131 23 yd 71 08 49 21 yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd MT410 7 5 10 2 5 14 131 23 yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83 yd 292 96 yd 71 08 yd MT415 11 15 6 10 125 77 65 62yd 49 21 yd 109 36 yd 82 02yd 60 15 yd MT420 15 20 10 8 114 83 yd 65 62 yd 43 74yd 109 36 yd 76 55yd 54 68 yd MT425 18 5 25 10 8 125 77 65 62 yd 38 28 yd 164 04 yd 82 02yd 54 68 yd MT430 22 30 16 6 164 04 65 62yd 43 74 164 04yd 76 55yd 54 68 yd MT440 30 40 25 4 164 04 yd 60 15yd 38 28 yd 164 04yd 76 55yd 54 68 yd MT450 37 50 35 5 218 72 yd 71 08yd 54 68 4 164 04 76 55yd 54 68 yd 460 45 60 50 0 218 72yd 60 15yd 32 81 164 04 65 62 4 43 74 475 55 75 70 2 0 218 72 yd 54 68 4 27 34 164 04 60 15 yd 32 81 yd 4100 75 100 95 410 218 72yd 49 21yd 27 34 164 04 60 15 yd 32 81 yd MT Series Motor Cable cross sec
3. Inputs Functions assigned Inputs Functions assigned Outputs Outputs LI1 LO1 LI2 LO2 LI3 LO3 LI4 LO4 LI5 LIG 12 LI7 LI8 LI9 R1 LI10 R2 LI11 R3 LI12 R4 LI13 RP LI14 Encoder 263 User settings tables Other para meters table to be created by the user Code Name Customer setting Code Name Customer setting 264 Index functions 2 wire 2C ar 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 181 3 wire 3C 37 speed 142 speed around a reference 144 AUTO DC INJECTION 136 AUTOMATIC RESTART 211 Auto tuning 39 AUTO TUNING BY LI 196 Brake logic control 150 CATCH ON THE FLY 212 Command and reference channels 111 Deferred stop on thermal alarm 216 Direct power supply via DC bus 206 DRIVE OVERHEAT 215 ENA SYSTEM 74 ENCODER CONFIGURATION 95 EVACUATION 204 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS 238 FAULT RESET 210 FLUXING BY LI 147 Half floor 205 High speed hoisting 161 JOG 138 Limi
4. COF 268 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AMOLOVS 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 11 774 LN3IW3SVNVN 8 L N N N N N nd LoNnd NOILVOITddV Q o N N LO lt 732 91 xx 1 549 S1nd4n0O SLNdNI N N N N lt L Tap 1041NOO IO ON t L 335 S NILL3S 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 Code COL CoP Cor EPI ERE Cr H LrH3 Lr HH Er big LrL3 Crly CSE LEd CEE dHL dHr dH5 dbn 965 dLF dL dL D dE Z dEL dL b dL d dL r do 90 Id dO 90 15 269 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S 1 102 NOILVOINQWINOO 6 11 234 774 LN3A39VNVMW LINVS 81 e e NI N N N N iO NI NI LO NI nd LONN NOILVOITd
5. Run command Speed 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 137 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting JOG Pulse operation The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals Selecting the assigned logic input or bit activates the function nO Not assigned L11 L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 117 to L110 L110 MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 1111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO profile C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in profile IO profile C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in profile IO profile C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile profile can be switched without logic inputs The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1 0000000000 Example 2 wire control operation tCC 2C Motor Ramp Ramp frequency 1 DEC DE2 forced to 0 1 s Reference JGF reference 0 JGF referenc
6. NI nd LONN NOILVOITddV lt N e ON D e gt 3 i eo ON lt 133 91 1 549 S1nd4n0O SLNdNI 1041NOO t1 335 5931135 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 Code 5 5 5L rEH E r 5 5H3 5HF 5HL SAr SAE SCL 54 5dLeg Sdd SFC SFd SFr 511 SmE SOP 5 5P3 SPY SPS SPE SP 1 5PH 5PH 5P IU 277 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 1 uB 3 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 1 N 114 LN3A39VNVMW LINVS 87 1 e e NI Oo LoNnd c lo eo N N N e gt N NI lO iO 133 91
7. NN rdG x 169 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID feedback ass L1 No nO Not assigned function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 Analog input MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension has been inserted RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted O Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder has been inserted Network Al AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus Note If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 234 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted AI net channel No nO The parameter can be accessed if PID feedback ass PIF Network AI AIU1 This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu No nO Not assigned Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen card nEt Communication if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable J Min PID feedback Value for minimum feedback Adjustment range from 0 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 JJ Max PID feedback 1 1992 Value for maximum feedback
8. 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 9 COMMUNICATION 3 SAVE AS 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 4 PASSWORD 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 5 LANGUAGE 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 1 6 COMMAND Using integrated display keypad Summary of functions Power up Code Name Page PELS PTC MANAGEMENT 209 Displays the state of the drive ae oe FAULT RESET 210 HEr AUTOMATIC RESTART 211 PL ON THE FLY 212 MOTOR THERMAL PROT 214 OUTPUT PHASE LOSS 214 IP k INPUT PHASE LOSS 215 DHL OVERHEAT 215 SAE THERMAL ALARM STOP 216 EEF EXTERNAL FAULT 217 USb UNDERVOLTAGE MGT 218 E IE IGBT TESTS 219 LFL 4 20mA LOSS 220 InH FAULT INHIBITION 221 LLL COM FAULT MANAGEMENT 222 ENCODER FAULT 223 Ede TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT 223 FHF FREQUENCY METER 225 sl d DYNAMIC LOAD 227 Bi P DB RES PROTECTION 228 BU PROTECTION 228 EnF AUTO TUNING FAULT 228 I CARDS PAIRING 229 LFF FALLBACK SPEED 230 RAMP DIVIDER 230 dL 1 DC INJECTION 230 207 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt The parameters in the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters
9. FrH 55 Fre Fry FSE FEd L IE LPE HFF 5 H5U Ibr lbr R IdL2 laH Inr In SP 271 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S 1 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 114 LN3A39VNVMW LINVS 87 1 N N nd LoNnd NOILVOITddV Zl eo eo 133 aNVWIWOO 9 4 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI e lt e e 100 i up 1041NOO t1 335 S NILL3S 1 DNISO LINOM UI 5 Code index of parameter codes L IdtoL IHd JUL L IHtoL IHH LHF LHr LAS 1 LbLg2 LbL 3 LEZ LEr LCE Ld5 LES LEE LFA LFF LFlLe LFLG LFLH 151 152 COE Lol LU ld LU IH LUIS Luz 1 1025 103 272 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4
10. See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the first current limitation is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the second current limitation is active I Limit 2 value 1 0 to 1 65 In 2 1 5 In 2 Second current limitation The parameter can be accessed if Current limit 2 LC2 is not No nO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 56 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 214 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect Current Limitation 1 First current limitation The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 56 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 214 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 181 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Line contactor command The line contac
11. 500 to 500 or 1600 to 1600 according to rating PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference 0 Hz 0 to 500 or 1600 according to rating See page 171 1 See page 171 1 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed 59 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PEr PID error Alarm 0 to 65535 1 100 See page 171 Regulator error monitoring threshold Speed input 1 to 100 See page 172 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input Preset ref PID 2 See page 174 1 See page 174 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 See page 174 1 page 174 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 4 See page 174 1 See page 174 Preset PID reference Brake release FW 0 to 1 32 In 2 See page 154 Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement Brake release Rev
12. Note During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Not done tAb Auto tuning status for information only cannot be modified O Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor Pending Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress Failed FAIL Auto tuning has failed Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor 2 Output Ph rotation ABC AbC ABC AbC Forward ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring 39 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Parameters that can be changed during operation or when stopped Name Description Factory setting 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 40 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 1 2 MONITORING MAP 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick Using integrated display keypad Power up m Displays the state of the drive 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad This menu can be used to display the inpu
13. 5 iL nbio EN 1 1 1 m ES 34 n 5 55 g 3 3 35 o D 2 Soa g otc c iB ow oa c 2 2 505 5 Y 735 c 58 8 o Ho S o o 5 8 o 5 5 x o oa Y gt 0 o X Lu o c a x iL 5 gt e 0 153 brt Brake Release time Ibr Brake release FW tbE Brake engage delay bEt Brake engage time ttr Time to restart Key 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake assignment n Note If the brake is assigned only ramp stop is possible Check the Type of stop Stt page 134 Brake logic control can only be assigned if Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVC V SVC I CUC or FVC FUC Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection extended to R3 or if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to 102 or LO4 be selected 901 401 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 105 No nO Movement type
14. Code HIL RJL RL e ACC Hdd A IIR IIE IIF 115 A IIE A IZE 2 125 IZE A IJA IJE IJF IJL 135 HI3E IHH IHE lal SHE 145 IHE IL 1 ANDE 266 index parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 05 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT F LU n 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 25 dr 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1 SIMPLY START CON 5 09 3 1 2 MONITORING 5UP 1 3 SETTINGS SEE 1 6 COMMAND E EL 4 PASSWORD HUI Ag IF HU IE e D 1 1 2 HUL 1 AOL AOL T HPH IS e D ASH2 ASH J ASLI o amp 51 02 H5L3 N HEr 1 Ks
15. Traveling HOr Resistive load movement translational motion of overhead crane for example Hoisting UEr Driving load movement hoisting winch for example If Weight sensor ass PES page 160 is not No nO Movement type bSt is forced to Hoisting UEr Brake contact No nO If the brake has a monitoring contact closed for released brake L1 No nO Function inactive LI Li1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 1 Brake impulse No nO The parameter be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 160 and if Movement type bSt Hoisting UEr L1 No nO The motor torque is given in the required operating direction at current Ibr Yes YES The motor torque is always Forward check that this direction corresponds to ascending at current Ibr 2 IBR 216 The torque is in the required direction at current Ibr for Forward and Ird for Reverse for certain specific applications Brake release FW 1 0 to 1 32 In 2 Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 160 0 to 1 32 In 2 0 Brake release Rev 1 Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement The parameter can be accessed if Brake impulse 2 IBR 210
16. 1Hz 3Hz 5Hz 10Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz 10 000 1 000 100 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 1 1 12 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Motor current ItH 213 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor protect type Ot L1 No nO No protection O Self cooled ACL For self cooled motors Force cool FCL For force cooled motors Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 10096 Motor therm level Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay 2 Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm logic output or relay Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm logic output or relay Overload fault mgt Freewheel YES Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault O Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned
17. amp 2 e 5 5 o o 5 5 S o c E 2 x g o 9 5 9 s g a 5 6 5 gt 5 m a uw Ref operations page 130 1 e 4 1 e 1 speed 3 page 143 e e 1 Management of limit switches page 149 e Preset speeds page 140 1 e 1 PID regulator page 170 e 4 e e 1 e Traverse control page 202 e 1 JOG operation page 138 lt e e e 1 Brake logic control page 154 e e e e e e Catch on the fly page 212 e e 1 DC injection stop page 134 e e 2 1 e Fast stop page 134 e 2 1 Freewheel stop page 134 e e speed around a reference page 145 e e e e 1 High speed hoisting page 165 e e e e e Torque control page 176 e 1 e 1 e 1 e 1 1 1 1 1 e e e Load sharing page 79 e e Positioning by sensors page 189 e e 1 Synchronous motor page 71 e e e 1 Torque control and these functions are only incompatible while torque control mode is active 2 Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated 3 Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 see diagrams on pages 112 and 113 4 Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator e Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions functions which cannot be active at the
18. 4 Freewheel stop No nO Not assigned L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 07 to L110 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile can be switched without logic inputs The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 83 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent No nO Fast stop assign Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 124 L1 No nO Not assigned LH See the assignment conditions on page 118 The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 bit in I O profile IO at 0 If the input returns to sta
19. Brake feedback The brake feedback contact does not match the brake logic control The brake does not stop the motor quickly enough detected by measuring the speed on the Pulse input input Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control circui Check the mechanical state of the brake Check the brake linings DB unit sh Circuit Short circuit output from braking unit Braking unit not connected Check the wiring of the braking unit and the resistor Check the braking resistor The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt DUb parameter page 228 if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive at and above 55 kW 75 HP at 230 and at and above 90 kW 125 HP at 460V Precharge Charging relay control fault or charging resistor damaged Thyr soft charge DC bus charging fault thyristors Turn the drive off and then back on again Check the internal connections Inspect repair the drive Encoder coupling Break in encoder s mechanical coupling Check the encoder s mechanical coupling Control Eeprom Internal memory fault control card Power Eeprom Internal memory fault power card Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Turn off reset return to factory settings Inspect repair the drive Encoder Encoder feedback fault Check Number of pulses PGI and Encoder type EnS page 72
20. Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 2 preset speeds No nO O No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 118 4 preset speeds No nO No nO Function inactive LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds J 8 preset speeds L1 No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 118 To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds 1 16 preset speeds No nO No nO Function inactive LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 To obtain 16 speeds you must also configure 2 4 and 8 speeds 140 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 2 0 to 1600 Hz Ll Preset speed 3 1 Preset speed 4 4 Preset speed 5 4 Preset speed 6 1 Preset speed 7 2 Preset speed 8 Li Preset speed 9 Preset speed 10 Preset speed 11 1 Preset speed 12 Li Preset speed 13 1 Preset speed 14 1 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 9 100 Hz The appearance of these Preset speed x SPx parameters is determined b
21. 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 173 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 2 preset PID ref O No nO Function inactive LI L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active 4 preset PID ref No nO Make sure that 2 preset PID ref Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this function L1 No nO Function inactive L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active l 2 preset PID ref 1 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 2 Pr2 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 3 preset PID ref 1 600 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 I 4 preset PID 1 900 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2
22. AI3 max value 0 to 20 0 mA AI3 filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering AI3 range 0 100 POS 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 4 20 mA input 4 corresponds to reference 100 12 mA corresponds to reference 096 20 mA corresponds to reference 10096 Since AI3 is in physical terms a bidirectional input the 10096 nEG configuration must only be used if the signal applied is unidirectional A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration 0 0 AI3 Interm point X tonon mm Input delinearization point coordinate 096 corresponds to Min value CrL3 if the range is 0 100 max value CrH3 AI3 min value 096 corresponds to CrL3 if the range is 100 gt 100 100 corresponds to AI3 max value CrH3 AI3 Interm point Y Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 90 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Al4 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al4 in order to check for example for compatibility problems Al4 Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 10U Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input Al4 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The
23. 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI i qup 1041NOO 335 S NILL3S 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW uI 5 Code 5PII 5P 5PI3 SP I4 15 IB 5Pd SPL 5 5 Sr P 55b SEd SEN SEr SEE SUL 1 ERJ EHr Ebre Eb5 ECC ECE Ed I EdC 278 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 uB 3 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 1 e e CN 114 LNANS9VNVW LINVS 8 L ike N ES X 5 t N NI N LONN NOILVOITddV N D eo N iO 202 N 133 aNVWIWOO 91 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI 1041NOO t1 335 S NILL3S 5 220 UI 5 LYVLS Code I
24. Displays the state of the drive Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration Example with graphic display keypad RUN Term 50 00 2 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A 4 PASSWORD PIN code 1 Status Unlocked PIN code 1 9520 PIN code 2 Unlocked Upload rights z Permitted Download rights Unlock drv Min 7 Unlocked Max 9999 Code gt gt Quick The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to unlocked OFF no password or when the correct code has been entered Before protecting the configuration with an access code you must Define the Upload rights ULr and Download rights dLr Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a safe place where you will always be able to find it The drive has 2 access codes enabling 2 access levels to be set up PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to the factory It can only be accessed in Expert mode Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used the other must remain set to OFF OFF Note When the unlock code is entered the user access code appears The following items are access protected Return to factory settings 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu The channels and parameters protected by the 1 13 USER MENU as well a
25. No nO Function inactive L11 L11 to LI6 116 Li7 to LI10 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI11 Li11 to LI14 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted To assign reinitialization press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 210 1 0 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Automatic restart No nO Function inactive Yes YES Automatic restart after locking on a fault if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods 1 s 5 s 10 s then 1 minute for the following attempts The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained Use 2 wire control 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL see page 83 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury If the resta
26. fes 32 9 Next parameter save The display flashes when value is stored All the menus are drop down type menus which means that after the last parameter if you continue to press W you will return to the first parameter and conversely you can Switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter Alarm not selected Alarm selected Example List of group 1 alarms in INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG menu l O A number of alarms can be selected by checking them as follows The digit on the right indicates selected 7 not selected The same principle is used for all multiple selections 26 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC Using graphic display keypad Basic Access to 5 menus only and access to 6 submenus only in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 2 ACCESS LEVEL p gt 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE 5 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 1 1 2 1 3 SETTINGS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Standard This is the factory set level Access to 6 menus only and access to all submenus in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY
27. See the assignment conditions on page 118 Switching 2 parameter sets 1 3 parameter sets No nO Function inactive Freq Th att FtA Switching Freq threshold Ftd page 62 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 62 L114 See the assignment conditions on page 118 Switching 3 parameter sets Note In order to obtain 3 parameter sets 2 parameter sets must also be configured 2 PARAMETER SELECTION The parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display keypad if 2 parameter sets is not No Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT a tick then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT Example PARAMETER SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment SET 1 The parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were selected With the graphic display keypad RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Term 0 00 2 0A SET1 Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 9 51 S Deceleration 2 Begin Acc round i E Max 999 9 With the integrated display terminal
28. Thread guide motor Cam The Anti oscillation function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the Traverse control function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor trH and trL see page 202 Two motors must be used one master and one slave The master controls the speed of the yarn guide the slave controls the winding speed The function assigns the slave a speed profile which is in out of phase with that of the master This means that synchronization is required using one of the master s logic outputs and one of the slave s logic inputs Run command on master and slave Traverse control command on master and slave gt t Yarn guide motor rH speed trL master drive tSY SnC synchronization t trH trL Winding motor speed slave drive 200 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Connection of synchronization Master drive Slave drive MT Series SnCO LOe Q SnCl The starting conditions for the function are Base speeds reached on both drives Yarn control trC input activated Synchronization signal present Note On the slave drive the Quick step High qSH and Quick step Low qSL parameters should generally be left at zero 201 Textiles 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory
29. 50 00 2 80 RUN Term 50 00 2 80 FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE ENT RP assignment 25 45 kHz 225 kHz Frequency ref RP min value RP max value RP filter 42 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad Communication RUN Term 50 00Hz COMMUNICATION MAP Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 F230 Hex W0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP PROG CARD SCANNER COMMUNICATION MAP indicates the types of bus used for control or reference the corresponding command and reference values the status word the words selected in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu etc The display format hexadecimal or decimal can be configured in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu Term 50 00Hz 80 COM SCANNER INPUT MAP Com Scan In1 val Com Scan In4 val Com Scan In5 val Com Scan In6 val 0 Com Scan In7 val 0 Com Scan In8 val 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP RUN Term 50 00 2 80 CMD WORD IMAGE p Modbus cmd 0000 Hex CANopen cmd 0000 Hex COM card cmd 0000 Hex Prog card cmd 0000 Hex Com Scan Out1 val Com Scan Out2 val Com Scan Out3 val Com Scan val
30. F Motor frequency Reference 0 d e No nO Ref memo ass L1 No nO Function inactive LI1 111 to LI6 116 Li7 to L110 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Assignment to a logic input Function active if the assigned input is at 1 146 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor fluxing No FnO O Not cont FnC Non continuous mode Continuous FCt Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection page 136 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 134 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVCI or FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVCI FVC FUC or Sync SYn SVC V UUC at and above 55 kW 75 HP for and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for MTeeeeN4 the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor In Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up In Not cont FnC mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The
31. MS See page 135 Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting F nn Auto DC inj level 1 IU Level of standstill DC injection current This parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 136 is not No nO This parameter is forced to O if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 1 OTe 30 s 0 55 Standstill injection time This parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 136 is not No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC FUC or Sync SYn this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 0 to 1 2 In 1 0 5 In 1 219 level of standstill DC injection current This parameter ca
32. Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 13 Graphic display keypad The graphic display keypad is standard on all series drives The graphic display keypad can be disconnected and reconnected remotely on the door of an enclosure for example using the cables and accessories available as options see catalog Description of keypad 1 Graphic display 2 Function keys F1 F2 F3 F4 See page 15 7 ESC key Aborts a value a parameter or a menu to return to the previous selection 3 STOP RESET button 6 Button for reversing the direction of rotation of the motor 4 RUN button 5 Navigation button Press ENT To save the current value To enter the selected menu or parameter Turn CW To increment or decrement a value CCW To go to the next or previous line To increase or decrease the reference if control via the terminal is activated 14 Graphic display keypad Description of the graphic screen Term 0 00 Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 Display line Its content can be configured the factory settings show The drive state see page 16 The active control channel Term Terminals HMI Graphi
33. Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS i End Dec round 1 10 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 132 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 500 or 1600 Hz Ramp E threshold according to rating Ramp switching threshold The 219 ramp is switched if the value is not 0 0 deactivates the function and the output frequency is greater than Frt Threshold ramp switching can be combined with Ramp switch ass rPS switching as follows LI or bit Frequency Ramp 0 Frt ACC dEC 0 gt Frt AC2 dE2 1 lt Frt AC2 dE2 1 gt Frt AC2 dE2 Ramp switch ass L1 No nO Not assigned LI L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 0 AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assi
34. n10U AO3 max Output 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Voltage 100 or Voltage n10U Scaling AO3 min 0 to 100 0 0 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation 96 0 96 Scaling AO3 max 0 to 100 0 100 0 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO3 Filter 0 to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering 108 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display see MONITORING CONFIG menu and viewed via the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs this alarm group is activated Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Selection to be made from the following list LIG PTC al PLA LI6 PTC probe alarm PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 Ext fault al EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm slipping al AnA Slipping alarm I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 61 Freq Th att FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 62
35. 0 00 to 100 PID derivative gain Derivative gain PID ramp 1 0 to 99 9 s 0s PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 and vice versa No nO PID correct reverse No nO Yes YES Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive Example pressure control with a compressor If PIC YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive Example temperature control using a cooling fan 1 500 to 500 or 1600 0 Hz Min PID output to 1600 according to rating Minimum value of regulator output in Hz 0 to 500 or 1600 Max PID output according to rating Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm 1 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF 1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Max fbk alarm 1 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 PID error Alarm 9 0 to 65535 2 Regulator error monitoring threshold PID integral reset L1 No nO Function inactive O LI See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the
36. 0 to Rated motor freq FrS Measurement spd Speed stabilized for measurement The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO High speed Limit Orto tos n Cs Current limitation at high speed The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO I Limit CSO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 56 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode a if this has been enabled see page 214 to 500 or 1600 Hz 40 Hz according to rating I Limit frequency Frequency threshold above which the high speed limitation current is active The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO I Limit CSO Rope slack config No nO Rope slack function The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO No nO Function inactive Drive estim 011 Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive Ext sensor PES Measurement of the load using a weight sensor can only be assigned if Weight sensor ass PES page 160 is not No nO 0 0 Rope slack trq level 0 Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off load as a of the rated load The parameter can be accessed if Rope slack tr
37. 1 page 61 Freq meter Alarm FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 62 Dynamic load alarm Load variation detection see DYNAMIC LOAD dLd page 227 See the multiple selection procedure on page 26 for the integrated display and 17 for the graphic display FI Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A1C Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A1C 109 1 06 COMMAND CtL Using graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG MAIN MENU Code lt lt 1 DRIVE MENU 1 6 COMMAND E 1 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 4 PASSWORD 1 9 COMMUNICATION 5 LANGUAGE 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Using integrated display keypad Power up xxx Displays the state of the drive 110 1 06 COMMAND CtL The parameters in the 1 6 COMMAND CtL menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Command and reference channels Run commands forward reverse s
38. 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Simplified menu for a quick start Visualization of current motor and input output values Accesses the adjustment parameters which can be modified during operation Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc I O configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc Configuration of fault management Communication parameters fieldbus Motor drive diagnostics Identifies the drive and the internal options Access to configuration files and return to factory settings Specific menu set up by the user in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu N A 23 Integrated display keypad MT Series drives also include an integrated display terminal with a 7 segment 4 digit display The graphic display keypad described on the previous pages and the integrated keypad are included as standard Functions of the display and the keys MOTORTRONICS 2 Modbus status LEDs Four 7 segment displays 2 CANopen status LEDs Exits a menu or parameter or aborts the displayed value to return to the previous value in the memory Returns to the previous menu or parameter or increases
39. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury i Customized macro Read only parameter only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified O Yes YES 37 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard mot freq 60Hz 50 IEC bOHz IEC 50 60Hz 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS below High speed HSP page 40 Freq threshold Ftd page 62 Rated motor freq 5 and Max frequency tFr Input phase loss Im to grive O Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus Freewheel YES Fault with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss IPL but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault This parameter is only accessible in this menu on MT2P5037M3 to 201075 3 drives used with a single phase supply g Rated motor power to drive 2 to drive Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 According to drive According to drive d Rated motor volt rating rating and Standard mot f
40. Not separ SIM Reference and command not separate Separate SEP Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in I O profile 10 profile 10 profile When 8 serie SE8 is selected and I O profile IO is deselected the drive automatically returns to the factory setting this is mandatory This factory setting only affects the 1 DRIVE MENU menu It does not affect either 1 9 COMMUNICATION or 1 5 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With the graphic display a screen appears to perform this operation Follow the instructions on the screen With the integrated display press ENT and hold it down for 2 s This will save the selection and return to the factory setting 119 1 06 COMMAND CtL rrs switching The parameter can be accessed if Profile CHCF Separate SEP profile IO 1 ch1 active Cd1 channel 1 Cd1 active no switching ch2 active 2 channel 2 2 active no switching LH See the assignment conditions on page 118 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel channel 1 Cd1 is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 channel channel 2 2 is active i channel 1 Terminals tEr Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display keypad Modbus Mdb Integra
41. Stop mode in the event of a fault freewheel Linear acceleration and deceleration ramps 3 seconds Low speed 0 Hz High speed 60 Hz Motor thermal current rated drive current Standstill injection braking current 0 7 x rated drive current for 0 5 seconds No automatic starts after a fault Switching frequency 2 5 kHz or 4 kHz depending on drive rating Logic inputs 111 forward 112 Forward 2 operating direction 2 wire control on transition 113 114 LI5 LI6 inactive not assigned Analog inputs speed reference 0 10 V AI2 0 20 mA inactive not assigned Relay R1 The contact opens in the event of a fault or drive off Relay R2 Inactive not assigned Analog output AO1 0 20 mA inactive not assigned If the above values are compatible with the application the drive can be used without changing the settings Option card factory settings The option card inputs outputs are not factory set Application functions The tables on the following pages show the most common combinations of functions and applications in order to guide your selection The applications in these tables relate to the following machines in particular Hoisting cranes overhead cranes gantries vertical hoisting translation slewing lifting platforms Elevators elevators in retrofit up to 1 2 m s Handling palletizers depalletizers conveyors roller tables Packing carton packers labeling mac
42. 0 01 ramp up to 99 99 seconds 0 1 ramp up to 999 9 seconds L1 1 ramp up to 6000 seconds This parameter is valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration dEC Acceleration 2 2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 N Acceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 64 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Deceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 64 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven LI Acceleration 2 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 0s See page 133 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven g Deceleration 2 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 0 133 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Begin Acc round ato 19098 10 See page 132 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as 96 of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 2 ramp time 1 End Acc round 10 See page 132 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a 96 of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 10096 Begin Acc round tA1 0 to 100 1096 2 Begin Dec round See page 132 Rounding of start of
43. Auto DC inj level 1 tbE Brake engage delay ttr Time to restart 151 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn 0 attained Descending Fluxed motor Ascending lbr attained uonoefu EOD Frequency 4 Reference Brake logic control vertical movement in open loop mode A Flux current 4 Rated flux Direction of operation Torque current Brake contact State of brake 4 Released Engaged control Type of motor Key bEn Brake engage freq bEt Brake engage time Brake release freq brt Brake Release time gt 2 22 069 2 2 ae ae e o 2 gt m mE S 33 5 2 152 Frequency 4 Brake logic control vertical or horizontal movement in closed loop mode 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn 3 L Bur20 Pee a uonoefu EN 5 Be 9 5 9 wo LL 5 CPs 2 28 E 1
44. Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at 0 as soon as the drive stops 220 to 320 V 220V 1 Evacuation Input Minimum permissible AC voltage value of the emergency power supply The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO Evacuation freq Value of the evacuation mode frequency reference The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO The adjustment range is determined by the Low speed LSP page 51 Rated motor freq FrS and Rated motor volt UnS page 64 parameters and by Evacuation Input V rSU above If LSP lt Frs x rSU UnS rSP min LSP rSP max Frs x rSU UnS If LSP z Frs x rSU UnS rSP Frs x rSU UnS Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 204 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Half floor The half floor function is designed for elevator applications When an elevator sets off from floors and half floors the cycle time for half floors can be too long as the elevator does not have time to reach full speed before crossing the slowdown limit switch As a result the slowdown time is unnecessarily long The half floor function can be used to compensate this by not triggering slowdown until the speed reaches a preset threshold Half floor speed HLS in order that the final part of the path will be the same as for a standard floor T
45. K1 x K2 K1 Speed LBC1 LBC2 K2 4 gt Torque torque x 1 LBC3 E cu LBC 80 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 81 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Using graphic display keypad 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 2 3 wire control Code gt gt Quick 1 DRIVE MENU Using integrated display keypad Power up Displays the state of the drive 82 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 The parameters in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ECE AJ 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C 2E O 2 wire 2C 3E 3 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring MT Series 424 LI L LI1 forward ERE reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring Series 24 LM L2 Lk LI1 stop 112 forward EFEN E Llx reverse A WARNING UNINTENDE
46. This reference is not assigned therefore the directions of operation must be given via the control channel logic inputs for example Minimum and maximum values input values The minimum value corresponds to a minimum reference of 096 and the maximum value to a maximum reference of 10096 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value It may also be negative Reference Reference A 4 100 90 100 0 I 0 Freq min value Freq max value 300 kHz Freq max value Freq min value 300 kHz EIL EFT EFr EIL Reference 4 100 96 U Freq min value 0 Freq max value 300 kHz input EIL EFr A reference can be obtained at zero frequency by assigning a negative value to the minimum value 94 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 95 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder usage The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted L1 No nO Function inactive In this case the other parameters cannot be accessed Fdbk monit SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only O Spd fdk reg The encode
47. 0 to 1 32 In 2 See page 154 Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement to 5 00 s Brake Release time See page 155 Brake release time delay Auto AUtO Auto AUtO Brake release freq 0 to 10 Hz See page 155 Brake release frequency threshold Auto AUtO Auto AUtO 0 to 10 Hz Brake engage freq See page 155 Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage delay See page 155 Time delay before request to engage brake To delay the engaging of the brake for horizontal movement only if you wish the brake to engage when the drive comes to a complete stop 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 60 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DIEI Brake engage time otom ooe 0s See page 155 Brake engage time brake response time z Auto AUtO
48. 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 154 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake Release time 0 to 5 00 s Brake release time delay Brake release freq 1 F One Brake release frequency threshold initialization of acceleration ramp The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 154 is Hoisting UEr Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control Brake engage freq 9 Auto AUtO Brake engage frequency threshold The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not FVC FUC Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control Brake engage at 0 INT nO Brake engages at regulated zero speed The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC FUC Can be used to engage the brake at zero speed in closed loop mode with speed regulation This parameter can be used to adjust the brake engage delay onc
49. 116 LI7 Li7 to L110 L110 MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 1111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile can be switched without logic inputs Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 No nO Reference saved Associated with the speed function this parameter can be used to save the reference When the run commands disappear saved to RAM When the line supply or the run commands disappear saved to EEPROM Therefore the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is the last reference saved L1 No nO No save the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is Low speed LSP see page 40 RAM rAM Saved in RAM EEprom EEP Saved in EEPROM 143 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn speed around a reference The reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing subtraction multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant see th
50. 50 50Hz IEC 50 60Hz NEMA 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters High speed HSP page 40 Freq threshold Ftd page 62 Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS and Max frequency tFr nPr Rated motor power TQUE rating According to drive rating The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn Rated motor power given on the nameplate in HP if Standard mot freq bFr 60 2 60 KW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 60Hz NEMA 60 Rated motor volt UnS According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate MT2eee 100 to 240 V MT4eee 200 to 480 V Rated mot current ml According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot Rated motor current given on the nameplate SYn 60 Hz The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate SYn The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 50 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 50 Hz The maximum value is limited to 500 Hz if
51. 9 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description SERS _ Preset speed 15 See page 141 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 See page 141 Preset speed 16 EE Multiplying coeff graphic terminal Speed limitation See page 145 Limitation of speed variation PID prop gain See page 170 Proportional gain PID integral gain See page 171 Integral gain PID derivative gain See page 171 Derivative gain PID ramp See page 171 PIP2 and vice versa Min PID output See page 171 Minimum value of regulator output in Hz Max PID output See page 171 Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm See page 171 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Max fbk alarm See page 171 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range 0 to 1600 Hz Factory setting 90 Hz 0 to 1600 Hz 0 to 100 100 0 to 50 Multiplying coefficient be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 page 130 has been assigned to the 10 0 01 to 100 0 01 to 100 0 00 to 100 Oto 99 9 s
52. Auto AUtO Jump at reversal 0 to 10 Hz See page 156 Time to restart 0 to 5 00 s See page 156 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence 0 to 30096 10096 Motoring torque lim See page 179 Torque limitation in generator mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 179 0 0 Gen torque lim 109 See page 179 Torque limitation in generator mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 179 is Traverse freq high 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz See page 202 Traverse freq low See page 202 0 to Traverse freq Quick step High high tr See page 202 0 to Traverse freq Quick step Low low trL See page 202 Current threshold nd Current threshold for attained CtA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 High torque thd 300 to 300 10096 High current threshold for High tq att ttHA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 as a of the rated motor torque Low torque thd 300 to 300 50 Low current threshold for Low tq att ttLA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 as a 96 of the rated motor torque 1 In corresponds t
53. EdLe Edn 5 EFU EFr EHH EHd EHr EHE ELH ELC EL IL ITI EL ELS EnL 0 Er ErH Ears ErP r EST 55 ESE 279 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S 1 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 11 114 LN3A39 VNVMW LNV 87 1 zz Y NES Y Lye ON LoNnd NOILVOITddV 133 91 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI ite F 29 1041NOO t1 79 335 5931138 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 ATdINIS Code EEd EEde EEd3 EEH EEL ELL EUn EUP ELS 13 us Ubr urs LL b ULP r U IHH UILI UILY 5 UGH LUH3 280 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL
54. FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 222 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Load slip detection PIRE L1 No nO Fault not monitored Only the alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay Yes YES Fault monitored The fault is triggered by comparison with the ramp output and the speed feedback and is only effective for speeds greater than 1096 of the Rated motor freq FrS see page 64 In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and if the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to 0 Encoder coupling No nO Fault not monitored Yes YES Fault monitored If the brake logic control function has been configured the factory setting changes to Yes YES Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES is only possible if Load slip detection Sdd Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC and Brake assignment page 154 is not No nO The fault monitored is the break in the mechanical coupling of the encoder In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and i
55. Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1 Forced local assign FLO is forced to No nO if Profile CHCF page 119 I O profile IO 1 Forced local Ref No nO nO Not assigned control via the terminals with zero reference Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input A13 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal Reference HMI Frequency ref LFr page 46 command RUN STOP FWD REV buttons RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted If the reference is assigned to an analog input RP PI or Encoder PG the command is automatically assigned to the terminals as well logic inputs LI Time out forc local 0 1 to 30s The parameter can be accessed if Forced local assign FLO is not No nO Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode 234 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE RUN Term 50 00 2 FAULT HISTORY internal co
56. N Hus IS ls AUE 65 bbA r9 154 bol OD N Co Co bELd 155 bEd 15 bEn bEE 38 Jo Jo b IP 154 D md b 267 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 774 LN3A39VNVMW LINVS 87 1 NI N N N LoNnd N N pas lO pas iO iO 133 91 e gt 1 549 S1nd4n0O SLNdNI 1041NOO t1 335 5931135 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 Code br A brH H3 br HH brad ETE brr brt bru b5P bUb CCFO LFL LFP5 CHA CHAE CHEF CHI Cle CL CLL CLO CLS CnF 1 LaFee LnF5
57. No source assigned Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus can be configured using net channel AIC 1 page 92 0000000000000 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 234 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury No nO Summing ref 3 Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above A Subtract ref 2 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above S
58. Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear 192 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SET 2 The parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 SET 3 The parameter can be accessed if 3 parameter sets is not No and if at least 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 Note We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and check is made to ensure it has been performed correctly Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching Interdependencies between parameters must be respected even between different sets Example The highest Low speed LSP must be below the lowest High speed HSP 193 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS CONFIG The drive may contain up to 3 configurations which can be saved using the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu page 238 Each of these configurations can be activated remotely enabling adaptation to 20r 3 different motors or mechanisms multimotor mode 20r 3 different configurations for a single motor multiconfiguration mode The two switching modes cannot be combined Note The following conditions MU
59. Stop limit config The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop Active low LO Stop controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs Active high HIG Stop controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs _ Slowdown forward No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above 1 Slowdown reverse Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above Active high HIG Slowdown limit The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown Active low LO Slowdown controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits inputs Active high HIG Slowdown controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits inputs 189 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Disable limit sw The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned L1 No nO Not assigned LH See the assignment conditions on page 118
60. Stops the drive although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied to be taken into account on the next RUN command Bumpless Does not stop the drive the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied 122 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Using graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A ENT TS COMMAND ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT w 9 SWITCH 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 9 COMMUNICATION 4 PASSWORD 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 5 LANGUAGE 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 1 13 USER MENU 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Using integrated display keypad Summary of functions Power up Code Name Page PEF REFERENCE SWITCH 129 Displays the state of the drive DR I REF OPERATIONS 130 PPE 131 SEES STOP CONFIGURATION 134 HarL AUTO DC INJECTION 136 JUL JOG 138 sss PRESET SPEEDS 140 UPd SPEED 143 SPEED AROUND REF 145 MEMO REFERENCE 146 EL FLUXING BY LI 147 F Sa LIMIT SWITCHES 149 E BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 1
61. arC Name Description Adjustment range OF 1 Sinus filter No nO n No nO No filter JE O Yes YES Use of a filteror an AC reactor on the output of the drive to limit overvoltages on the motor and reduce the ground fault leakage current Sinus filter is forced to No nO on MT2P5 MT401 Note The settings for Current Limitation and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 56 must be made once Sinus filter has been set to Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 66 has been set to V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 This is due to the fact that for certain ratings this configuration will result in a reduced factory setting 1 36 In for current limitations CAUTION If Sinus filter Yes YES Motor control type Ctt page 66 must be V F 2pts UF2 V F 5pts UF5 or SVC V UUC only and Max frequency tFr must not exceed 100 Hz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage g Switching freq 1 According to rating According to rating Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive MT Series or W the rating and the configuration of the Sinus filter and Motor surge limit SUL parameters page 77 If the value is less than 2 kHz Cur
62. assignments LO1 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false LO2 assignment Identical to LO1 LO2 delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO2 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO2 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 100 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description
63. drC 66 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS 1 84 1 6 COMMAND CtL 112 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 125 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt _209 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM 233 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 237 1 11 IDENTIFICATION _239 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS _240 1 13 USER MENU USr _243 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD PLC _244 3 OPEN SAVE AS _245 4 PASSWORD 247 6 MONITORING CONFIG 249 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 253 MULTIPOINT SCREEN 258 Maintenance _259 Faults Causes Remedies _260 User settings tables 266 Index of functions 268 Index of parameter codes 269 you begin Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure on this drive A DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE Read and understand the Installation Manual before installing or operating the MT Series drive Installation adjustment repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical standards in force concerning protective grounding of all equipment Many parts of this variable speed drive including the printed circuit boards operate at the line voltage DO NOT TOUCH Use only electrically insulated tools DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present DO NOT short across terminals and PC or across the DC bus capacitors Install and close all the covers before appl
64. fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 90 Drv therm state al 100 Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm logic output or relay Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 215 Elevator 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Deferred stop on thermal alarm This function is designed in particular for elevator applications It prevents the elevator stopping between two floors if the drive or motor overheats by authorizing operation until the next stop At the next stop the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value which undershoots the set threshold by 2096 Example A trip threshold set at 8096 enables reactivation at 6096 One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive and one thermal state threshold for the motor s which will trip the deferred stop Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Thermal alarm stop O No nO Function inactive
65. nO 1 Auto Manual assign nO The PID is always active L11 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the PID is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 manual operation is active LJ Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 3 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups 1 Manual reference No nO Manual speed input The parameter can be accessed if Auto Manual assign PAU is not No nO nO Not assigned function inactive Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic keypad is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 3 Range 0 01 to 9
66. to With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO configuration C210 C210 C211 C211 to With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration C215 C215 C301 C301 to With a communication card in profile IO configuration C310 C310 C311 C311 to With a communication card regardless of configuration C315 C315 CD00 00 to In profile IO configuration CD10 Cd10 CD11 Cd11 to Regardless of configuration CD15 Cd15 Note In profile IO configuration 111 cannot be accessed if 2 3 wire control page 83 3 wire 3C 112 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed either A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Inactive communication channels are not monitored no lock following malfunction in the event of a communication bus failure Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C415 will not pose a risk in the event of the failure of the associated communication bus Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 118 1 06 COMMAND CtL 1 Ref 1 channel Analog input AI2 12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus
67. 119 Ifthe assigned input or bit is at 1 Ref 1B channel Fr1b is active Ref 1B switching rCb is forced to ch1 active Fr1 if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the terminals analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 119 Ref 1B channel No nO nO Not assigned Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display keypad Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Note In the following instances only assignments via the terminals are possible Profile CHCF 2 Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the terminals analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 119 PID configured with PID references via the terminals L1 L1 EJ EJ E1 EJ EI D EJ E EI P1 129 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting GE Summing ref 2 Selection of reference to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 Ref 1B channel Fr1b nO
68. 2 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display keypad is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 174 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Torque regulation Speed control Speed reference gt gt Torque reference Torque ref sign tSd Speed Torque ratio trt Torque ramp time Torque LI Torque current limitation The function can be used to switch between operation in speed regulation mode and operation in torque control mode In torque control mode the speed may vary within a configurable deadband When it reaches a lower or upper limit the drive automatically reverts to speed regulation mode fallback and remains at this limit speed The regulated torque is therefore no longer maintained and two scenarios may occur the torque returns to the required value the drive will return to torque control mode Ifthe torque does not return to the required value at the end of a configurable period of time the drive will switch to fault or alarm mode A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the changes in the behavior of the motor do not presen
69. 3 mA or if Al4 Type Al4t page 91 Voltage 10U Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 220 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Parameter can be accessed in Expert mode Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LJ Fault inhibit assign To assign fault inhibit pres
70. Adjustment range 4 reference PIP2 15000 1 6000 1 PID feedback PIF1 PIF2 4500 20000 Other parameters rSL parameter Can be used to set the PID error threshold above which the PID regulator will be reactivated wake up after a stop due to the max time threshold being exceeded at low speed tLS Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive for example pressure control with a compressor If PIC YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive for example temperature control using a cooling fan The integral gain may be short circuited by a logic input An alarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output 167 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Manual Automatic operation with PID This function combines the PID regulator the preset speeds and a manual reference Depending on the state of the logic input the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function Manual reference PIM Analog inputs to Frequency input Encoder Predictive speed reference Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension c
71. Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 99 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 97 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control LO1 delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO1 active at 11 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC
72. CNFO 1 or 2 see page 194 SET1 2 or 3 see page 192 Select the parameter using ENT then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT 1 or 2 parameters can be selected Example PARAM BAR SELECT MONITORING 247 0 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description 1 Display value type O Digital Display of one or two digital values on the screen factory configuration O Bar graph Display of one or two bar graphs on the screen List Display a list of between one and five values on the screen 2 PARAMETER SELECTION Alarm groups can only be accessed if Display value type List Frequency ref in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration Torque reference as a 96 Output frequency in Hz Motor current in A ENA avg speed in Hz Motor speed in rpm Motor voltage in V Motor power in W Motor torque as a 96 Mains voltage in V Motor thermal state as a Drv thermal state as a DBR thermal state as a Consumption in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating Run time in hours length of time the motor has been switched on Power on time in hours length of time the drive has been switched on IGBT alarm counter in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms PID reference as a 96 PID feedback as a 96 PID error as a PID Output in Hz 02 Not applicabl
73. Com Scan Out5 val Com Scan Out6 val 0 Com Scan val 0 Com Scan Out8 val 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 FREQ REF WORD MAP COM SCANNER INPUT MAP and COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input and 8 output for integrated Modbus and for fieldbus cards Ref Modbus 0 0 Hz Ref CANopen 0 0 Hz Com card ref 0 0 Hz p Prog Card ref 0 0 Hz 43 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad Communication continued The state of the LEDs the periodic data the address the speed and the Term 50 00 2 COMMUNICATION Modbus ABCD Hex CANopen Frequency ref 12 5Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 F230 Hex W0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP format etc is given for each bus LED off 69 LED on Communication via Modbus RUN Term 50 00 2 80 MODBUS NETWORK DIAG COM LED Mb NET frames nb Mb NET CRC errors Code Quick Communication via the graphic display keypad RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 MODBUS HMI DIAG COMLED 09 Mb HMI frames nb Mb HMI CRC errors Communication via CANopen RUN Term 50 00 2 80 CANopen MAP RUN LED ERR LED PDO1 IMAGE PDO2 IMAGE PDO3 IMAGE Can
74. FUNC I FUn Limit switch management This function can be used to manage trajectory limits using limit switches The stop mode is configurable When the stop contact is activated startup in the other direction is authorized Example Reverse Forward stop Reverse Forward stop N The stop is activated when the input is at O contact open 148 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 Stop FW limit sw No nO No nO Function inactive nO L11 L11 to LI6 Li6 117 L Li7 to L110 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted L111 i 1 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to 415 C415 Not applicable CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile IO can be switched without logic inputs 4 Stop RV limit sw No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw LAF below 1 Stop type Freewheel nSt O Ramp stop rMP O Fast stop FSt O Freewh
75. FW corresponds to lifting the load For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted set BIP 2 Ibr e g ascent always with a load and descent always without a load 2 Brake release current Ibr and if BIP 2 Ibr Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor During testing adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly 3 Acceleration time For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0 5 seconds Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit The same recommendation applies for deceleration Reminder For a hoisting movement a braking resistor should be used 4 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 5 Brake release frequency blr in open loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 6 Brake engage frequency bEn Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 7 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application 1 Brake impulse bIP No 2 Brake release current Ibr Set to 0 3 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 4 Brake engage frequency bEn in open
76. Hz 60 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors gs Rated motor freq 10 to 1600 Hz the rated drive curre Indicate d ne allauon Manual and ne drive nameplate 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Max frequency 10 to 1600 Hz The factory setting is 72 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 50 Hz The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq FrS It must not exceed 500 Hz if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not V F or if the drive rating is higher than 450 Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Max frequency tFr Auto tuning No nO No nO Auto tuning not performed Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Caution e Itis essential that all the motor parameters are correctly configured before starting auto tuning Induction motor Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr Synchronous motor Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS A
77. Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted LI RV Inhibition No nO No no Yes YES Inhibition of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID summing input etc is interpreted as a zero reference 00000000000 i Stop Key priority Yes YES No Yes YES Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as the command channel Press and hold down ENT for 2 seconds in order for any change in the assignment of Stop Key priority PSt to be taken into account This will be a freewheel stop If the active command channel is the graphic display the stop will be performed according to the Type of stop Stt page 134 irrespective of the configuration of Stop Key priority PSt g Profile Not separ SIM O Not applicable for MT Series
78. Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not V F or if the drive rating is higher than MT450 Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Rated motor freq FrS J rpm increment Increment of parameter Rated motor speed nSP x1 rpm 1 x1 rpm 1 Increment of 1 rpm to be used if Rated motor speed nSP does not exceed 65535 rpm x10 rpm 10 Increment of 10 rpm to be used if Rated motor speed nSP exceeds 65535 rpm Note Changing rpm increment InSP will restore Rated motor speed nSP to its factory setting _I Rated motor speed 0 to 96000 rpm According to drive rating The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn Rated motor speed given on the nameplate Adjustable between 0 and 65535 rpm if rpm increment INSP x1 rpm 1 or between 0 00 and 96 00 krpm if rpm increment INSP x10 rpm 10 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 65 53 or 96 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x 100 slip as a 96 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in
79. SCF display IGBT faulty xtF where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned IGBT short circuited x2F where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned 219 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting I AI2 4 20mA loss lgnore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if AI2 min value CrL2 page 89 is not greater than 3 mA or if AI2 Type AI2t page 89 Voltage 10U Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of
80. The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 3 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 135 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Auto DC injection Yes YES Automatic current injection on stopping at the end of the ramp L1 No nO No injection Yes YES Adjustable injection time Continuous Ct Continuous standstill injection Warning there is an interlock between this function and Motor fluxing FLU page 147 If Motor fluxing FLU Continuous FCt Auto DC injection must be No nO Note This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent It can be accessed with the drive running Auto DC inj level 1 1 Level of standstill DC injection current Auto DC injection is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 1 1 sus oe Standstill injec
81. VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 4 0 to 1600 Hz 0 VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 U5 Oto 600 or 1000 0 according to rating VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 n F5 0 to 1600 Hz 0 EN V F profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 67 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC J Vector Control 2pt The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not Sync mot SYn No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active Used in applications in which the motor rated speed and frequency need to be exceeded in order to optimize operation at constant power or when the maximum voltage of the motor needs to be limited to a value below the line voltage The voltage frequency profile must then be adapted in accordance with the motor s capabilities to operate at maximum voltage UCP and maximum frequency FCP Motor voltage Max voltage UCP Rated motor volt UnS 4 Frequency Rated motor freq Freq Const Power FCP According to drive According to drive 4 constant power rating rating and Standard mot freq bFr The parameter can be accessed if Vector Con
82. Yes YES Function active to be used on drives connected in parallel via their DC bus Used to balance the braking power between the drives The Braking level Ubr parameter must be set to the same value on the various drives The value Yes YES is possible only if Dec ramp adapt brA No nO see page 133 Load sharing No nO When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed and each is controlled by a drive this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors To do this it varies the speed based on the torque No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active The parameter can only be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 Load correction n Rated correction in Hz The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Torque Nominal torque 4 Frequency Nominal torque 4 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 79 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Load sharing parameters that can be accessed at expert level Principle Torque reference Reference Speed loop Speed Balancing Filter K LBC LBF LBC1 LBC2 LBC3 The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed with two factors K1 and K2 K
83. assigned If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF2 fault mode This parameter can be accessed if Output cont OCC is assigned or if Output contact rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor to 5 00 s Delay to open cont Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop This parameter can be accessed if Output contact fdbk rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor If it is set to 0 the fault will not be monitored If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 185 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Positioning by sensors or limit switches This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or using control word bits Slowing down Stopping The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 or a falling edge change from 1 to 0 The example below has been configured on a rising edge A Forward run command Reverse run command Slowdown forward Stop FW limit sw Speed Low speed LSP 0 The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured The
84. channel with speed the value of reference rFr after ramp may be copied at the same time in accordance with the Copy channel 1 2 COP parameter see page 121 If the reference is switched via rFC see page 120 from one reference channel to any other reference channel with speed the value of reference rFr after ramp is always copied at the same time This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place 142 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting speed assignment No nO No nO Function inactive nO L11 L11 to LI6 Li6 117 L to L110 1110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 15 In VO profile can be switched without logic inputs 0000000000 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 1 Speed assignment No nO nO Function inactive L11 L11 to LI6
85. gain to minimum Leave the derivative gain rdG at 0 Observe the PID feedback and the reference Switch the drive ON OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times the proportional gain rPG in order to ascertain the best compromise between response time and stability in transient phases slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing reference varies from the preset value in steady state gradually increase the integral reduce the proportional gain rPG in the event of instability pump applications find a compromise between response time and static precision see diagram Lastly the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved although this will make it more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability as it depends on 3 gains Perform in production tests over the whole reference range 168 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Stabilization time Regulated value rPG high Overshoot Reference Static error Proportional gain Integral gain The oscillation time Reference 2 a N low time and correct rdG increased time frequency depends on the system dynamics Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error rPG L Z L
86. if DB res protection brO is not No nO Rated power of the resistor used g DB Resistor value 0 1 to 200 ohms 0 1 ohms This parameter can be accessed if DB res protection brO is not No nO Rated value of the braking resistor in ohms Brake res fault Mgt s Management of short circuit DB unit sh circuit and overheating Internal th sensor InFb faultsin the braking unit O Ignore nO Fault ignored Configuration to be used if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive Freewheel YES freewheel stop Autotune fault mgt Freewheel YES Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Card pairing Function can only be accessed in Expert mode This function is used to detect whenever an option card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way When pairing password is entered the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored On every subsequent power up these parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive locks in HCF fault mode Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to the original situation or re enter the pairing password The following parameters are verified The type of card for all cards The software version for the two con
87. in this case the following parameters cannot be accessed O Yes YES Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm CAUTION The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Drv therm state al 0 to 11896 Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop L Motor therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 216 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting External fault ass L1 No nO Function inactive LI1 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned bit is at there is no external fault If the assigned bit is at 1 there is an external fault Logic can be configured via External fault config LEt if a logic input has been assigned External fault config Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a logi
88. of motors connected in parallel on the same drive FVC FUC Closed loop current flux vector control for motor with incremental encoder type sensor can only be selected if an encoder card has been inserted This type of control is recommended when using in a closed loop configuration It provides better performance in terms of speed and torque accuracy and enables torque to be obtained at zero speed It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive It is essential that the encoder check page 73 is performed successfully before selecting FVC FUC O V F 2pts UF2 Simple V F profile without slip compensation It supports operation with Special motors wound rotor tapered rotor etc number of motors in parallel on the same drive High speed motors Motors with a low power rating in comparison to that of the drive Voltage Uns 1 The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS and UO Frequency FrS O 5pts UF5 5 V F profile As V F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance saturation Voltage UnS U5 The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS UO to U5 and to F5 FrS gt F5 FA F3 F2 gt F1 Frequency T l r 1 1
89. only in the Hoisting and Mast slave macro configurations Hoisting Movement type bSt Hoisting UEr page 154 Brake contact No nO page 154 Brake impulse bIP No nO page 154 Brake release FW Ibr Rated mot current nCr page 154 Brake Release time brt 0 5 s page 155 Brake release freq Auto AUtO page 155 Brake engage freq bEn Auto AUto page 155 Brake engage time bEt 0 5 s page 155 Engage at reversal bEd No nO page 156 Jump at reversal JdC 7 Auto AUtO page 156 Time to restart ttr 0 s page156 Current ramp time brr 0 s page 158 Low speed LSP Rated motor slip calculated by the drive page 40 Output Phase Loss OPL Yes YES page 214 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Catch on the fly FLr No nO page 212 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Mast slave Motor control type Ctt SVC I page 66 Note These assignments are forced every time the macro configuration changes except for Motor control type Ctt for the Mast slave macro configuration if it is configured in FVC Return to factory settings Returning to factory settings with Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl page 240 will return the drive to the selected macro configuration The Macro configuration CFG parameter does not change although Customiz
90. out TUBIS If fault has been configured Time delay for taking SSF Limitation fault into account Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 223 1 0 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor This function uses the Pulse input input from the VW3A3202 extension card and can therefore only be used if this card has been inserted and if the Pulse input input is not being used for another function Example of use An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor Time in seconds gt When applied to the Pulse input input this signal supports Measurement and display of the motor speed signal frequency 1 T This frequency is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 46 or 48 Overspeed detection if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold the drive will trip on a fault Brake failure detection if brake logic control has been configured If the speed does not drop sufficiently quickly following a command to engage the brake the drive will trip on a fault This function can be used to detect worn b
91. output is to be transferred with 0 20 mA range 2 In motor In motor being the equivalent of a 0 8 In drive The parameter motor OCr varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current or a range of 2 5 times the rated drive current Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must not modify the lower limit which therefore remains at its factory setting of 096 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper limit by 0 5x the rated motor torque or 100 100 5 80 96 new value lower limit range x ASH2 104 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AO1 assignment No nO nO Not assigned motor OCr Current in the motor between 0 and 2 In In rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Motor freq OFr Output frequency from 0 to Max frequency tFr Ramp out OrP From 0 to Max frequency tFr Motor torq Motor torque between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Sign torque Stq Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign corresponds to the motor mode e g during acceleration etc and the sign to the generator mode braking e g during deceleration etc sign ramp OrS Signed ramp output between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr PID ref
92. parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V min value The parameter can be accessed if Type Al4t Voltage 10U 0 to 20 0 mA Al4 max value The parameter can be accessed if AI4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V 14 max value The parameter can be accessed if Type Al4t Voltage 100 filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering range 0 100 POS 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input 0 V corresponds to reference 100 5 V corresponds to reference 0 10 V corresponds to reference 100 Interm point X 0 to 10096 Input delinearization point coordinate 096 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 gt 10096 Max value Min value 0 corresponds to 2 if the range is 100 gt 100 10096 corresponds to Max value Interm point Y 0 to 10096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 91 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 92 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 93 1 9 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 Configuration of the encoder input serving as a reference with a frequency generator
93. r 2 Ref 2 channel Key Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment 114 1 06 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Separate SEP configuration Separate reference and command Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example If the reference is in forced local mode via analog input at the terminals command in forced local mode is via LI logic input at the terminals The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1 Fr1b and Fr2 FLUE nO Ji 4 AI2 4 1 1 1 1 LCC4 RUN STOP T FWD REV Graphic display keypad LI Profile TEN F L 0 Forced local Cmd switching COS SEP CMD Forward Reverse STOP Graphic display STOP keypad Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile T Commands Cd1 Cd2 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card 115 1 6 COMMAND StL Command channel for profile IO configuration Separate reference and command as in Separate SEP configuration The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference cha
94. rated torque 1 Torque ref sign No nO Function inactive LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the torque sign is the same as the reference If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the torque sign is the opposite of the reference 0 to 1000 LI Torque ratio Coefficient applied to Torque reference 1 Oto 99 99 s Torque ramp time Rise and fall time for a variation of 10096 of the rated torque Speed SPd 1 Torque control stop Speed SPd Speed regulation stop in accordance with the type of stop configuration see page 134 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Spin SPn Zero torque stop but maintaining the flux in the motor This type of operation is only possible if Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC 4 Spin time 0 to 3600 s 1s The parameter can be accessed if Torque control stop tSt Spin SPn Spin time following stop in order to remain ready to restart quickly Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 176 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 2 x Max Positive deadband frequency tFr Positive deadband Value added algebraically to the speed reference Example for dbP 10 If
95. reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 2 Negative deadband 0 to 2 x Max frequency tFr Negative deadband Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference Example for dbn 10 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 Torque ctrl time out 0 to 999 9 s Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of a fault or alarm Torq ctrl fault mgt Alarm ALrM Response of drive once time Torque ctrl time out rtO has elapsed Alarm ALIM Fault FLt Fault with freewheel stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 177 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Torque limitation There are two types of torque limitation With a value that is fixed by a parameter With a value that is set by an analog input Al pulse or encoder If both types are enabled the lowest value is taken into account The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus Torque limit activ tLA Motoring torque Yes lim tLIM YES Torque Q limitation via LI parameter Gen torque lim Pa 7 lt No Limitation value Analog limit act tLC Lowest value taken into account Y
96. stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 4 AI3 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if AI3 min value CrL3 page 90 is not greater than 3 mA Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 2 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if Al4 min value CrL4 page 91 is not greater than
97. switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Faults are reset when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the fault has disappeared The STOP RESET button on the graphic display terminal performs the same function See pages 25 to 261 for a list of faults that can be reset manually Product reset No nO Parameter can only be accessed in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply No nO Function inactive Yes YES Reinitialization Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The parameter changes back to No nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete The drive can only be reinitialized when locked D BDEGEODLG GO CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage No nO 1 Product reset assig Parameter can only be modified in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization via logic input Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input The drive can only be reinitialized when locked
98. the 3 preset speed Preset speed 3 SP3 page 141 Press STOP to stop the drive PID ref 2 Sets a PID reference equal to the 2 preset PID reference Preset ref PID 2 rP2 page 174 without sending a run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fri HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function PID ref 3 Sets PID reference equal to the 3 preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 page 174 without sending a run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fr1 HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function speed Faster only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 HMI LCC Press the key to run the drive and increase the speed Press STOP to stop the drive speed Slower only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 HMI LCC and if a different key has been assigned to speed Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed Press STOP to stop the drive T K Command the display keypad takes priority over Cmd switching CCS and over Ref 2 switching rFC 1 F2 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment Ll F3 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment Ll F4 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment HMI Stop When the T K function is assigned to a key and that function is active this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when control returns to the graphic display keypad Stop
99. the cable used It is defined to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the SOP parameter and the length of the cable between the drive and the motor For longer cable lengths a sinusoidal filter or a dV dt protection filter must be used For motors in parallel the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration Compare the length given in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power and select the shorter length Example Two 7 5 kW 10 HP motors take the lengths on the 15 kW 20 HP table row which are shorter than those on the 7 5 kW 10 HP row and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor with unshielded BORSE cable and SOP 6 the result is 40 2 20 m maximum for each 7 5 kW 10 HP motor In special cases for example different types of cable different motor powers in parallel different cable lengths in parallel etc we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals To retain the overall drive performance do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily 77 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length for 400 V line supply
100. the displayed value Goes to the next menu or parameter or Enters a menu or decreases the parameter or saves the displayed value displayed parameter or value Cg Note Pressing does store the selection Press and hold down 22 s v to scroll through the data quickly Save and store the selection ENT The display flashes when a value is stored Normal display with no fault present and no startup 43 0 Display of the parameter selected in the SUP menu default selection motor frequency CLI Current limit CtL Controlled stop on input phase loss dCb DC injection braking in progress FLU Motor fluxing in progress FSt Fast stop nLP No line power no line supply on L1 L2 L3 nSt Freewheel stop Obr Auto adapted deceleration PrA Power Removal function active drive locked rdY Drive ready SOC Controlled output cut in progress tUn Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault 24 integrated display keypad Accessing menus Power up Y XXX Displays the state of the drive amp i 9 toto meme WONTORNG z I Qo 9 C sme J 7 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG nm COMMAND APPLICATION FUNCT FAULT MANAGEMENT s
101. the drive in read only mode Lfr Leakage inductance in mH calculated by the drive in read only mode T2r Rotor time constant in mS calculated by the drive in read only mode Nominal motor slip Rated slip in Hz calculated by the drive in read only mode To modify the rated slip modify the Rated motor speed nSP page 64 Pr Number of pairs of poles calculated by the drive in read only mode Cust stator resist Cold state stator resistance per winding modifiable value In milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 0 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Idw Magnetizing current in A modifiable value Lfw Leakage inductance in mH modifiable value T2w Rotor time constant in mS modifiable value 70 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Synchronous motor Name Description R1rs Cold state stator resistance per winding in read only mode This is the drive factory setting or the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed Value in millionms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of millionms 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Nominal freq sync Motor frequency at rated speed in Hz calculated by the drive rated motor frequency in read only mode 71 1 4 M
102. this is safe Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 121 1 06 COMMAND StL As the graphic display keypad may be selected as the command and or reference channel its action modes can be configured The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display keypad and not on the integrated display keypad Comments The display terminal command reference is only active if the command and or reference channels from the keypad are active with the exception of T K command via the display keypad which takes priority over these channels Press T K command via the display keypad again to revert control to the selected channel Command and reference via the display keypad are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive The JOG preset speed and speed functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM or Separate SEP The T K command via the display keypad can be accessed regardless of the Profile CHCF Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 F1 key assignment O No Not assigned O Jog JOG operation Preset spd2 Press the key to run the drive at the 2 preset speed Preset speed 2 SP2 page 141 Press STOP to stop the drive Preset spd3 Press the key to run the drive at
103. time brr at the end of the Brake engage time bEt b2 brH2 1 When the brake is released the reference is enabled when the logic input changes to 1 When the brake is engaged the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time brr when the logic input changes to 0 A Run command 4 logic output bEt e Torque Frequency 4 Ibr Logic input Brake contact b2 brH2 0 _ Torque Frequency 4 bre Ibr b2 brH2 1 brH3 b3 p In closed loop mode only Management of the absence of brake contact response if it is assigned 0 O 0 0 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise the drive locks in a brF brake contact fault I 1 1 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise a bCA brake contact alarm is triggered and zero speed is maintained br H BRH_b4 In closed loop mode only Activation of the speed loop at zero if a movement for which no command has been given occurs measurement of a speed greater than a fixed min threshold 0 0 No action in the event of a movement for which no command has been given O 1 1 If a movement occurs for which no command has been given the dri
104. to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 2 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 2 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 i Output Phase Loss Yes YES L1 No nO Function inactive Yes YES Tripping on OPF fault with freewheel stop O Output cut OAC No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re established and catch on the fly performed even if this function has not been configured Note Output Phase Loss OPL is forced to Yes YES if brake logic control is configured see page 154 OutPh time detect Time delay for taking the Output Phase Loss fault into account 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication Parameter that can be modified during operation o
105. via the graphic display keypad is not authorized apart from the Stop key which locks all the drives If there is a fault on a drive this drive is displayed 255 Maintenance Servicing The MT Series does not require any preventive maintenance It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly Check the condition and tightness of the connections Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective average service life of fans 3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions Remove any dust from the drive Assistance with maintenance fault display If a problem arises during setup or operation first check that the recommendations relating to the environment mounting and connections have been observed The first fault detected is saved and displayed and the drive locks up trips or faults The drive switching to fault mode can be indicated remotely via a logic output or a relay which can be configured in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O menu see for example RT CONFIGURATION r1 page 97 Menu 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display keypad It displays faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry out tests see page 235 Clearing the fault Disconnect the drive power supply in the event of a non resettable fault Wait for the display to disappear completely Find the cause of t
106. with a O symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped PTC probes 3 sets of PTC probes can be managed by the drive in order to protect the motors 1 on logic input LI6 converted for this use by switch SW2 on the control card 10n each of the 2 option cards MT VW3A3201 and MT VW3A3202 Each of these sets of PTC probes is monitored for the following faults Motor overheating Sensor break fault Sensor short circuit fault Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via 21 calculation performed by the drive the two types of protection can be combined 208 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI6 PTC probe Can be accessed if switch SW2 on the control card is set to PTC No nO Not used O Always probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply Power PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected PTC1 probe No nO Can be accessed if a MT VW3A3201 option card has been inserted No nO Not used O Always probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control rem
107. 0 50 00Hz Selection of the menus to be ENT PARAMETER GROUP LIST replaced Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty RUN 1250 50 00 2 Command to return to factory Goto FACTORY SETTINGS settings ENT PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT validate RUN Term 1250A 50 00Hz Goto FACTORY SETTINGS This window appears if no group of parameters is selected First select the parameter group s Press ENT or ESC to continue ENT RUN Tem 1250A 50 00 2 Save config 239 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS I Config Source Choice of source configuration Inl Factory configuration return to selected macro configuration Config 1 CFG1 Config 2 CFG2 If the configuration switching function is configured it will not be possible to access Config 1 CFG1 and Config 2 CFG2 2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST Selection of menus to be loaded AII ALL All parameters Drive menu drM The 1 DRIVE MENU menu without 1 9 COMMUNICATION and 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD In the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Return std name page 251 returns to No Settings SEt The 1 3 SETTINGS menu without the IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP and Mot therm current ItH par
108. 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t 7 Current 0A AO2 max Output E The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t 7 Current 0A AO2 min Output d d The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U AO2 max Output 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U Scaling AO2 min ii Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO2 max 0 to 100 0 96 100 0 96 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO2 Filter 0 to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering 107 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting No nO AO3 assignment Same assignments as AO1 without dO 1 dO1 AO3 Type Current 0A O Voltage 100 Voltage output Current 0A Current output O Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Current AO3 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Current 0 min Output 0to 10 0 V The parameter be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Voltage 100 or Voltage
109. 00 Frequency gt input 30 00 RP min 0 RPmaxvalue 30 00 kHz value PFr kHz PIL Range output values For analog inputs only This parameter is used to configure the reference range to 0 210096 or 100 gt 100 in order to obtain a bidirectional output from a unidirectional input Reference Reference 4 100 100 1 1 Current Current 1 1 voltage Min value voltage 096 E input 096 input Min value Max value 20 mA Max value 20 mA Range 0 gt 100 or 10 V or 10 V 100 Range 100 gt 100 85 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LJ Reference template Standard bSd Standard 5 Frequency At zero reference the frequency LSP 4 71005 Reference 0 Pedestal bLS Frequency At reference 0 to LSP the frequency LSP 5 Reference 100 Deadband bnS Frequency At reference 0 to LSP the frequency 0 HSP Reference 100 Deadband 0 bnS0 Frequency This operation is the same as Standard bSd except that in the following cases at zero reference the frequency 0 The signal is less than Min value which is greater than 0 example 1 V on a 2 10 V input The signal is greater than Min value which is Ref greater than Max value e
110. 0Hz Failed OK OK Quick RDY Term 50 00Hz OA RDY Term 50 00Hz OA ENT TRANSISTOR TEST ENT TEST IN PROGRESS Check that a motor is connected 25 Enter the motor nameplate data ENT to perform the test ESC to cancel RDY Term 50 00Hz OA TRANSISTOR RESULT The result for each IGBT is displayed OK on 2 lines The first line shows whether or not it has short circuited on The second line shows whether or not itis open IGBT3 OK IGBT 4 OK IGBT 4 OK IGBT 5 OK IGBT 5 OK IGBT 6 short circuit IGBT 6 OK Note To start the tests press and hold down 2 s the ENT key 236 1 11 IDENTIFICATION Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 9 COMMUNICATION MAIN MENU ENT 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 11 IDENTIFICATION w s x TV71HU15N4 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 13 USER MENU 4 PASSWORD 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 5 LANGUAGE 6 04 1 product Vx x OPTION 1 EXTENSION CARD Vx x IE xx OPTION 2 FIPIO CARD Vx x IE xx GRAPHIC TERMINAL GRAPHIC S Vx x IE xx ENCODER RS 422 The 1 11 IDENTIFICATION menu can only be accessed on the graphic display keypad This is a read only menu that cannot be configured It enables the following infor
111. 1 1 1 F3 F4 F5 FrS Sync mot SYn For synchronous permanent magnet motors with sinusoidal electromotive force only This selection makes the Induction motor parameters inaccessible and the synchronous motor parameters accessible 66 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting UD LJ U0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 91 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 ES F1 to 1600 Hz 0 VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 U2 010 600 1000 0 according to rating VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 F2 0 to 1600 Hz 0 VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 U3 010 600 1000 0 according to rating VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 3 to 1600 Hz 0 VIF profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 1941 010 600 1000 0 according to rating
112. 1 to change to ABC abc 123 numerical values Do not use Use the navigation selector button to increment the character too high a multiplier 99999 alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the max display next or previous character respectively ENT RDY Term 0 00Hz OA Term 0 00 2 gt Customized Standard use of the factory set Standard unit Customized LBS Customized customization of the unit Nb characters max 96 mA etc select from drop down list Once you have entered the unit if you press ENT the Ramp increment screen will re appear in order to display the name Press ESC to return to Unit The message entered appears Term 0 00Hz while the View button is pressed RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A SERVICE MESSAGE ENT For any service dial Nb characters max 23 gt Names USER MENU NAME DRIVE NAME configuration serial no lines of messages names of Term 0 00Hz units etc are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite USER MENU NAME If no custom settings have been made the standard value appears names units etc Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters FLOW REFERENCE Use F1 to change to ABC abe 123 Use the navigation selector button to increment the character alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the next or previous character respectively Nb charac
113. 100 0 01 to 100 of signal on assigned input Point 2x LP2 must be greater than Point 1x LP1 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned 2 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 2x LP2 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Ibr 4 20 mA loss 0 to 1 36 In 1 Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4 20 mA loss fault is deactivated Recommended settings Ofor elevators Rated motor current for a hoisting application 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Q Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 160 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn High speed hoisting This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads It authorizes operation at constant power in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without exceeding the rated motor current The speed remains limited by the High speed HSP parameter page 40 The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself Principle Frequency 4 High speed HSP Ascending Ra
114. 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 11 NI N N N N N 232 N CN N N 232 NI NI N N N N N N NI 114 LN3A39VNVMW 81 LoNnd Zl 133 aNVWIWOO 91 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI lt lt Jg up 1041NO9O YOLON t1 335 5931135 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW ul 5 Code LU3d 1035 LU 5 LYS LSP I nLH3 nLHH nLH5 nLHB nLHH nLr nLr5 nL5 nflAad 5 nPr 273 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 ISONILLAS AMOLOVS 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 114 LN3A39VNVMW 87 1 ike N t LoNnd lO lO 133 GNVINNWOO 91 1 549 SL
115. 2 P54 P58 P5 IB P5r PSE PEL I PECE PELL PEH q5H TEE 15 red res r 275 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 114 LN3A39VNVMW 87 1 LoNnd Oo e iO lt eo 133 91 e O 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI Jg up 1041NOO t1 335 5931135 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW x lt 46 48 UI 5 Code r 3d r3H r35 r4 r 4H r45 AP r FL rFr rFE IL In P rPH r PE PE PF r rPI rPFU 5 r Pk F ip s Fi r5H5 rSd r5F r5L rsh 276 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AMOLOVS 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 774 LN3A39VNVMW 81
116. 2 alarm PtC2 Probe alarm 2 LIG PTC alarm PtC3 116 PTC probe alarm Fast stop in prog FSt Fast stop in progress Current Th attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 61 Freq Th attained FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 62 Freq Th 2 attained F2A 219 frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 62 Frequency ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Motor th state 5 Motor 1 thermal state attained External fault alarm EtF External fault alarm Auto restart AUtO Automatic restart in progress Remote FtL Line mode control Auto tuning tUn Performing auto tuning Undervoltage USA Undervoltage alarm Cnfg 1 act CnF 1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active HSP attained FLA High speed attained Load slipping AnA Slipping alarm Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active In braking brS Drive braking DC bus loading dbL DC bus loading Forward MFrd Motor running forward Reverse MrrS Motor running in reverse High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 61 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 61 Freq meter Alarm F
117. 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 s g 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time ms Time in ms Time in ms 52 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Special case Parameter K speed loop filter SFC not 0 This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time trajectory positioning or servo control When set to 100 as described above the regulator is a type without filtering of the speed reference Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on the previous page Example Setting for speed loop filter SFC 100 Speed prop gain SPG affects the bandwidth and response time Speed time integral SIt affects excessive speed Initial response Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 i Time in ms Initial response Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reduction in SIT w Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 S Time in ms Increase in SPG Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reduction in SIT w Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Increase
118. 3 10000 to 65536 0 to 655 3 According to drive rating Autotune L q axis LqS Stator inductance L 0 to 655 3 According to drive rating Autotune L q axis LqS Stator inductance L According to drive rating According to drive rating Cold state stator resistance per winding The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed The value can be entered by the user if he knows it Value milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 25 to 25102000 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not V F 2pts UF2 and V F 5pts UF5 Used to optimize the torque at very low speed increase IR compensation UFr if the torque is insufficient Check that the IR compensation UFr value is not too high when the motor is warm risk of instability J Slip compensation 0 to 300 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not V F 2pts UF2 V F 5pts UF5 and Sync mot SYn Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessari ly exact setting lt actual slip The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state but at a speed lo
119. 3S AMOLOVS 102 NOILVOINYWIWOO 6 11 774 LN3A39 VNVMW 87 1 LoNnd eo 133 GNVINNWOO 91 1 549 S1nd4n0O S1ndNI F 29 1041NOO t1 335 5931138 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 14 1 Code UBL UOL UPL usb US USL USP USE 281 282 283 MT programming manual en v3 2006 09
120. 4 Press ENT to deselect a menu 19 SETTINGS Press ENT to reselect a menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz IMPORTANT The protected channel or channels must be EROTECTION PROTECTED CHANNELS selected as a protected parameter on a selected channel PROTECTED CHANNELS HMI remains accessible on the channels that are not selected PROTECTED PARAMS POWERSUITE MODBUS CANopen COM CARD PROG CARD PROTECTED PARAMS PROTECTED PARAMS In these screens all parameters in the 1 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS DRIVE MENU menu can be protected 1 1 SIMPLY START ENT z and are displayed for selection except gt Ramp increment for the Expert parameters 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ENT Acceleration Press the All button to select all the parameters Press the All button again to Acceleration 2 deselect all the parameters Deceleration Deceleration 2 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT No selections can be made in this screen if there are no parameters PROTECTED PARAMS 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION PROTECTED PARAMS JOG Note The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not therefore displayed for th
121. 5 C415 Not applicable No Switching of 3 motors 3 configurations Note In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations 2 Configurations CnF 1 must also be configured 1 Auto tune assign nO O No nO Not assigned oO L11 111 1C See the assignment conditions on page 118 Auto pu is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 Note Auto tuning causes the motor to start up 196 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Traverse control Function for winding reels of yarn in textile applications Traverse control Winding drive drive Reel of yarn Gearbox Main shaft Winding motor N Thread guide Thread PN Ege NE Traverse control motor Cam Gearbox The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady compact and linear Run command A LI or traverse control bit Motor speed Base reference ACC ramp dEC ramp gt t start of function end of function Bit 15 of word LRS1 traverse control active The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been enabled When the traverse control command is disabled the dri
122. 54 EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS 160 H5H HIGH SPEED HOISTING 165 Pg PID REGULATOR 170 Prol PID PRESET REFERENCES 174 e Ee TORQUE CONTROL 176 EDL TORQUE LIMITATION 179 EL f 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 181 LLE LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 183 DUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD 185 POSITIONING BY SENSORS 189 PARAM SET SWITCHING 192 nnt MULTIMOTORS CONFIG 196 Po us AUTO TUNING BY LI 196 202 EVACUATION 204 HALF FLOOR 205 dE DC BUS SUPPLY 206 123 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn The parameters in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a O symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped Note Compatibility of functions The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible If there is an incompatibility between functions the first function configured will prevent the others being configured Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs A single input can activate several functions at the same time reverse and 274 ramp for example The user must therefore ensure that these funct
123. 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 2 CANopen fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated CANopen Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persist
124. 9 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 131 Q Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 172 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 999 9 Low speed time out Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 40 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor restarts if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period Note If Low speed time out 15 is not 0 Type of stop Stt page 134 is forced to Ramp stop rMP only if a ramp stop can be configured PID wake up thresh 0 0 to 100 0 0 If the PID and Low speed operating time tLS functions are configured at the same time the PID regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting operating at low speed then stopping and so on Parameter rSL restart error threshold can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP The function is inactive if tLS 0 or if rSL 0 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury
125. Adjustment range Factory setting LO3 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 100 LO3 delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO3 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO3 holding time 0 to 9999 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false LO4 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 100 LO4 delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO4
126. Adjustment range from Min feedback PIF1 to 32767 2 Min PID reference 1 150 Minimum process value Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to PID reference PIP2 2 Max PID reference 1 900 Maximum process value Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 4 Act internal PID ref 9009 Internal PID regulator reference No nO The regulator reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing subtraction multiplication functions see the diagram on page 112 Yes YES The PID regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI J Internal ref 150 Internal PID regulator reference This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 0 01 to 100 1 PID prop Proportional gain 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 graphic display keypad is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 170 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 01 to 100 PID integral gain Integral gain
127. C215 With integrated CANopen in profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Assignment of the reverse direction command 000000000 83 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 84 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input The minimum and maximum input values in volts mA etc are converted to in order to adapt the references to the application Minimum and maximum input values The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 096 and the maximum value to a reference of 10096 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Reference Reference A 4 10096 100 Current or Current or voltage or voltage or frequency frequency 0 input 0 Min value Max value 20mAor Max value Min value 20 mA or CrLx or CrHx or 10 V or CrHx or CrLx or 10 V or ULxorPIL UHxorPFr 30 00 kHz or PFr ULxorPIL 30 00 kHz For bidirectional inputs the min and max are relative to the absolute value for example 2 to 8 V Negative min value of Pulse input Reference A 1
128. Check that the encoder s mechanical and electrical operation verify its power supply and connections are all correct If necessary reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Dutput Ph rotation PHr parameter page 65 or the encoder signals Out contact stuck The output contactor remains closed although the opening conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit 257 Faults Causes Remedies IGBT desaturation Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Probable cause FOrn Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu internal com link Communication fault between option card and drive Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Check the connections Check that no more than 2 option cards max permitted have been installed on the drive Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive Rating error The power card is different from the card stored Check the reference of the power card Incompatible PB The power card is incompatible with the control card Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility Internal serial link Communication fault between the internal cards Check the internal connections In
129. D EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control tCC press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s It causes the following functions to return to factory setting 2 wire type tCt and Reverse assign rrS below and all functions which assign logic inputs and analog inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings It is advisable to configure this parameter before configuring the 1 6 COMMAND CtL and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 2 wire type Transition trn Level LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run 1 or stop 0 Transition trn A change of state is necessary to initiate operation in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply Fwd priority PFO State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop but the forward input always takes priority over the reverse input Reverse assign LI2 LI2 nO Not assigned L11 L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 117 to L110 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215
130. E2 The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned LI Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 05 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned Deceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 05 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 131 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 145 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Save reference Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0 1 s This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one logic input for each drive Itis also used to confirm line reference communication bus or network on several drives via a logic input This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is made
131. Format word 2 Format of word 2 Hex Hexadecimal Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 3 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 3 Format of word 3 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 4 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 4 Format of word 4 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign It will then be possible to view the selected words in the COMMUNICATION MAP submenu of the 1 2 MONITORING menu Example Term 35 00Hz 80 COMMUNICATION MAP F230 Hex 249 DISPLAY CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display keypad It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access parameters Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 6 MONITORING CONFIG ENT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG o 7 1 USER PARAMETERS Customization of 1 to 15 parameters 7 2 USER MENU Creation of a customized menu 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus an
132. Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq Th 2 attain F2d page 62 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att 15 Motor 1 thermal state attained Th mot2 att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 153 Motor thermal state attained Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning HSP attain FLA High speed attained Drive overheating Load mvt al bSA Braking speed alarm Brk cont al bCA Brake contact alarm PID error al PEE PID error alarm PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm 2 4 20 2 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 Al 4 20 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input 4 20 AP4 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Lim SSA Torque limit alarm Th drv att tAd Drive thermal state attained IGBT alarm tJA IGBT alarm Torque Control al rt Torque control alarm Brake R al bOA Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al APA Alarm generated by an option card Regen underV al UrA Reserved Rope slack alarm rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config rSd parameter page 165 High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 61 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd
133. IL Auto tuning has failed Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor Customized CUS Auto tuning has been performed but at least one parameter set by this auto tuning operation has subsequently been modified The Auto tuning parameter then returns to No nO following auto tuning parameters are affected Cust stator R syn rSAS page 69 Cust stator resist rSA Idw IdA LFw LFA and T2w page 70 Output Ph rotation ABC AbC HbE ABC AbC Forward ACh O ACB ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring Do not modify Output Ph rotation PHr parameter when Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC The direction of rotation must be modified if required before or during the procedure to check the encoder page 73 when Motor control type Ctt is not FVC FUC 65 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range i Motor control type SVC V SVC V Open loop voltage flux vector control It supports operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive O SVC I Open loop current flux vector control This type of control is recommended when replacing ATV58F used in an open loop configuration It does not support operation with a number
134. In order for any change in the assignment of HMI baud rate tbr2 to be taken into account you must Provide confirmation in a confirmation window if using the graphic display Press the ENT key for 2 s if using the integrated display HMI format Read only parameter cannot be modified Modbus Address OFF to 247 Modbus add Prg C Not applicable Modbus add Com C Modbus address of the communication card OFF to 247 The parameter can be accessed if a communication card has been inserted and depending on its configuration please consult the specific documentation Modbus baud rate 19 2 kbps 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 kbps on the integrated display 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display Modbus format 801 8E1 8n1 8n2 Modbus time out 0 1 to 30s CANopen address OFF to 127 CANopen bit rate 125 kbps 50 125 250 500 kbps 1 Mbps Error code Read only parameter cannot be modified 233 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting m See the specific documentation for the card used 1 Forced local assign LH 47 LI11 nO Function inactive LI1 b 16 116 to LI1 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI11 to LI14 1114 If MT VW3A3202 extended card has been inserted
135. MAIN MENU ENT 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 1 13 USER MENU 5 LANGUAGE Using integrated display keypad Power up 241 15 OPEN SAVE 5 This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Code Open To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display to the drive SAVE AS To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display R Term 0 00Hz 0A Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 3 OPEN SAVE AS DOWNLOAD GROUP See details on DY OPEN SAVE AS the next page A Drive menu Motor parameters Code gt gt Quick i Code Quick Prog control inside card Note Opening an empty file has no effect ENT RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A DOWNLOAD PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT continue ENT RDY 0 00Hz 0A DOWNLOAD Term 0 00Hz 0A SAVE AS Used ENT Free IN PROGRESS Saving to a used file deletes and replaces the RDY Term 0 00Hz configuration contained in DOWNLOAD this file DONE ENT or ESC to continue Various messages may appear when the download is requested IN PROGRESS DONE Error messages if download not possible Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE Do you want to cont
136. MT Series Variable speed drives Programming manual for AC motors Retain for future use Software V1 2 E MOTORTRONICS MT series Avant toute intervention Couper faiimentation et attendre 15 minutes Batoro servicim Remove power and wa 15 minutes Vor Eingril ist das Gert spannungslos z sehen 15 Minuton warten Prima intervenire togliere l alimentazione attendert 15 minuti tervenir en ol vanador echo y espere 15 minutos EMPRESA ILE d MOTORTRONICS MT series Contents Before you begin Documentation structure Software enhancements Steps for setting up the braking unit Factory configuration Application functions Setup Preliminary recommendations Graphic display terminal Description of terminal Description of the graphic screen First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu Subsequent power ups Programming Example of accessing a parameter Quick navigation Integrated display terminal Functions of the display and the keys Accessing menus Accessing menu parameters ko loo lo lox T e oo IN IO IO l IN lo lo I 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC 29 Structure of parameter tables 32 Interdependence of parameter values Finding parameter in this document 34 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM 35 1 2 MONITORING SUP 43 1 3 SETTINGS SEt 52 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL
137. N TYPE 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line the first 2 cannot be modified 6 2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode digital values or bar graph format 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG Selection of the words displayed and their format 246 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Alarm groups Frequency ref Torque reference Output frequency Motor current ENA avg speed Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state Consumption Run time Power on time IGBT alarm counter PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output 02 to 06 Config active Utilised param set in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration as a 96 in Hz in A parameter displayed in factory configuration in Hz in rpm in V in W as a 96 in V as a 96 as a 96 as a 96 in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms as a 96 as a 96 as a 96 in Hz Not applicable Not applicable
138. NG SUP Using integrated display keypad Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups Current alarm group numbers Internal PID reference PID reference via graphic display keypad can be accessed if the function has been configured as a process value Multiplication coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref MA2 MA3 page 130 has been assigned Frequency ref Hz Torque reference Can be accessed if the function has been configured Output frequency Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted and configured in speed feedback mode otherwise 0 appears Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 225 Hz Motor current A ENA avg SPEED The parameter can be accessed if EnA YES see page 75 Hz Motor speed Motor voltage V Motor power Motor torque Line voltage Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped V Motor thermal state thermal state DBR thermal state be accessed on high rating drives only Power consumption Wh kWh or MWh Run time Length of time the motor has been turned on Power on time Length of time the drive has been turned on seconds minutes or hours IGBT alarm counter Length of time the IGBT tem
139. NdLNO SLNdNI 29 1041NOO t1 335 S NILL3S 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW wo wo lO ike 01 5 Code n5L nSP n5P5 5 002 off al 505 alb ULL 05 PRH PRL PH5 PRU PES PFr PLH PL PHS PHr PIC P IF P IFI P P IL 274 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 114 LN3A39VNVMW 87 1 o N o N LoNnd eo e c 172 N 202 133 91 0 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI S 1 1041NOO t1 335 5931135 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW UI 5 Code P ITI P IPI P IFg P 15 POH PPn 5 Pr Pru PrP PS l P52 P53 P5
140. O No action O DC Maintain MMS This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible Ramp stop rMP Stop following an adjustable ramp Max stop time StM Lock out LnF Lock freewheel stop without fault UnderV restart tm 1 0 s to 999 9 s 1 0s Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for UnderV prevention StP Ramp stop rMP if the voltage has returned to normal Prevention level Undervoltage fault prevention level setting in V which can be accessed if UnderV prevention StP is not No nO The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value g Max stop time 0 01 to 60 00 s 1 00 s Ramp time if UnderV prevention StP Ramp stop rMP DC bus maintain tm DC bus maintain time if UnderV prevention 51 DC Maintain MMS Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 218 1 0 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IGBT test No nO No test L1 Yes YES The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent These tests cause a slight delay a few ms In the event of a fault the drive will trip The following faults can be detected Drive output short circuit terminals U V W
141. OPS PID regulator reference between Min PID reference PIP1 and Max PID reference PIP2 PID feedback OPF PID regulator feedback between Min PID feedback PIF1 and Max PID feedback PIF2 PID error OPE PID regulator error between 5 and 5 96 of PID feedback PIF2 Min PID feedback PIF1 PID Output OPI PID regulator output between Low speed LSP and High speed HSP Mot power OPr Motor power between 0 and 2 5 times Rated motor power nPr Mot thermal tHr Motor thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state thermal tHd Drive thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Torque 4Q tqMS Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign and the sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque regardless of mode motor or generator Example of usage master slave with the TORQUE CONTROL tOr function page 176 Meas mot fr OFrr Measured motor speed Sig o p frq OFS Assigned output frequency between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr Mot therm2 tHr2 Motor thermal state 2 between 0 and 200 96 of the rated thermal state Mot therm3 tHr3 Motor thermal state 3 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Uns TrqRef Utr Torque reference between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Uns TrqRef Utr Signed torque reference between 3 and 3 ti
142. OTOR CONTROL arC Selecting the encoder Follow the recommendations in the catalog and the Installation Manual Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted and the available selections will depend on the type of encoder card used The encoder configuration can also be accessed the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 72 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Encoder check procedure 1 Set Motor control type Ctt to a value other than FVC FUC even if it is the required configuration 2 Set in open loop mode following the recommendations on page 5 3 Set Encoder usage EnU No nO 4 Set Encoder type EnS and Number of pulses accordingly for the encoder used 5 Set Encoder check EnC Yes YES 6 Check that the rotation of the motor is safe 7 Setthe motor rotating at stabilized speed 15 of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds and use the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu to monitor its behavior 8 If it trips on an Encoder fault EnF Encoder check EnC returns to No nO Check Number of pulses and Encoder type EnS Check that the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder its power supply and connections are all correct Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Output Ph rotation PHr parameter page 65 or the encoder signals 9 Repea
143. OUTPUTS menu a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor 2 3 for remote information transmission Note As the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu is switched these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which information is required 195 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Multimotors No nO No nO Multiconfiguration possible O Yes YES Multimotor possible J 2 Configurations Na ino nO No switching L11 L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 L to L110 1110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted 1111 1 to LI14 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C111 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C211 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C415 C415 Not applicable Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations 3 Configurations o nO No switching L11 L11 to LI6 116 LI7 Li7 to L110 L110 MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C111 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C211 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C41
144. Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active DC charged dbL DC bus charging In braking brS Drive braking P removed Drive locked by Power removal input Fr met alar FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 62 I present MCP Motor current present Limit sw att LSA Limit switch attained Load alarm dLdA Load variation detection see page 227 Alarm Grp 1 AGI Alarm group 1 Alarm Grp 2 AG2 Alarm group 2 Alarm Grp 3 AG3 Alarm group 3 PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 LIG PTC PLA 116 PTC probe alarm Ext fault al EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning slipping al AnA Slipping alarm Drive overheating Load mvt al bSA Braking speed alarm Brk cont al bCA Brake contact alarm Lim T I att SSA Torque limit alarm Trq ctrl al 5 Torque control alarm IGBT IGBT alarm Brake R al bOA Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al Not aplicable AI3 Al 4 20 AP3 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input AI3 4 20 AP4 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Ready rav Drive ready
145. Power up Displays the state of the drive ENT s 231 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Scan IN1 address Address of the 15 input word Scan IN2 address Address of the 219 input word Scan IN3 address Address of the 3 input word Scan INA address Address of the 4 input word Scan IN5 address Address of the 5 input word Scan IN6 address Address of the 6 input word Scan IN7 address Address of the 7 input word Scan IN8 address Address of the 8 input word Scan Out1 address Address of the 15 output word Scan Out2 address Address of the 209 output word Scan Out3 address Address of the 3 output word Scan Out4 address Address of the 4 output word Scan Out5 address Address of the 5 output word Scan Out6 address Address of the 6 output word Scan Out7 address Address of the 7 output word Scan Out8 address Address of the 8 output word 232 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting HMI baud rate 19 2 kbps 9 6 or 19 2 kbps via the integrated display 9600 or 19200 bauds via the graphic display The graphic display terminal only operates if HMI baud rate tbr2 19200 bauds 19 2 kbps
146. ST observed Switching may only take place when stopped drive locked If a switching request is sent during operation it will not be executed until the next stop In event of motor switching the following additional conditions apply When the motors are switched the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration this being the definitive configuration option and communication cards Failure to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on an Incorrect config CFF fault Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode 1 3 SETTINGS SEt 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O 1 6 COMMAND CtL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn with the exception of the MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function to be configured once only 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 13 USER MENU USER CONFIG The name of the configuration specified by the user in the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode As in multimotor mode except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations Rated current Thermal current Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated speed Rated power IR compensation Slip compensatio
147. T 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of MAIN MENU menus 1 DRIVE MENU See next page 2 ACCESS LEVEL Defines which menus can be accessed level of complexity 8 OPEN SAVE AS Can be used to save and recover drive configuration files 4 PASSWORD Provides password protection for the configuration b LANGUAGE Language selection 6 MONITORING CONFIG Customization of information displayed on the graphic display terminal during operation 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Customization of parameters Creation of a customized user menu Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms for menus and parameters 22 Graphic display keypad 1 DRIVE MENU RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of 1 DRIVE MENU menus 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROLJ 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 4 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS
148. Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A gt gt MIN 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 6 MONITORING CONFIG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT Advanced 1 9 COMMUNICATION Access to all menus and submenus 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS Several functions can be assigned to 1 11 IDENTIFICATION each input 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Expert Access to all menus and submenus as for Advanced level and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 27 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC Using integrated display keypad Power up Displays the state of the drive bAS Limited access to SIM SUP SEt FCS USr COd and LAC menus Only one function can be assigned to each input Std Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Only one function can be assigned to each input AdU Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Several functions c
149. The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1 If at this time the drive is stopped or being slowed down by limit switches it will restart up to its speed reference 1 Stop type Ramp stop rMP The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Ramp stop rMP On ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop ramp time reduced by Ramp divider see page 134 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Deceleration type The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Standard Std Uses the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 2 ramp depending on which has been enabled Optimized OPt The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches in order to limit the operating time at low speed optimization of the cycle time the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial speed Stop distance No nO The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Activation and adjustment of the Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch function L1 No nO Function inactive the next two parameters will therefore be inaccessible L1 0 01 yd to 10 94 yd Stop distance range in yards g Rated linear speed 0 20 to 5 00 m s 1 00 m s The paramete
150. accessed if the encoder card has been inserted and the available selections will depend on the type of encoder card used The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 73 11 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC ENA SYSTEM ENA SYSTEM is a control profile designed for rotating machines with unbalanced load It is used primarily for oil pumps The operating principle applied Allows operation without a braking resistor Reduces mechanical stress on the motor shaft Reduces line current fluctuations Reduces energy consumption by improving the electric power current ratio ENA prop gain This setting is used to achieve a compromise between the reduced energy consumption and or line current fluctuations and the mechanical stress to which the motor shaft is subject Energy is saved by reducing current fluctuations and increasing the current while retaining the same average speed ENA integral gain This setting is used to smooth the DC bus voltage Start up the machine with a low integral and proportional gain proportional 25 and integral 10 in order to avoid an overvoltage trip in the absence of a braking resistor See if these settings are suitable Recommended adjustments to be made during operation To eliminate the braking resistor and therefore the increase in the DC bus voltage Display the machine speed on the graphic display keypad Reduce the integral gain value unt
151. active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO4 holding time 0 to 9999 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control bLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 101 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output by assigning 001 In this case when set to 0 this output corresponds to the AO1 min value 0 V or 0 mA for example and when set to 1 to the AO1 max value 10 V or 20 mA for example The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged As these differ from logic output characteristics it is important to ensure that they are compatible with the intended application Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 DO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 97 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor c
152. ad the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive Note CD14 and CD15 can only be used for switching between 2 networks They do not have equivalent logic inputs Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen neg CD00 LI2 1 C101 1 C201 1 C301 1 CD01 LI3 C102 C202 C302 CD02 114 103 203 C303 LI5 C104 C204 C304 CD04 LI6 C105 C205 C305 CD05 LI7 C106 C206 C306 CD06 LI8 C107 C207 C307 CD07 LI9 C108 C208 C308 CD08 LI10 C109 C209 C309 CD09 1111 110 210 C310 CD10 1112 111 211 C311 CD11 LI13 C112 C212 C312 CD12 1114 113 213 C313 CD13 C114 C214 C314 CD14 C115 C215 C315 CD15 1 If 2 3 wire control page 83 3 wire 3C LI2 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed 117 1 06 COMMAND CtL Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit 111 L11 to Drive with or without option LI6 LI6 117 to With MT VW3A3201 logic card 1110 1110 L111 L111 to With MT VW3A3202 extended I O card L114 1114 C101 C101 to With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO configuration C110 C110 C111 C111 to With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration C115 C115 C201 C201
153. ade switches to Display automatically 10 seconds later the display will vary depending on the selected configuration Users can return to MAIN MENU by pressing ENT or ESC 19 Graphic display keypad Programming Example of accessing a parameter Accessing the acceleration ramp RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Term 0 00Hz 1 3 SETTINGS Acceleration 0A Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Note To select a parameter Turn the navigation button to scroll vertically To modify a parameter Use the lt lt gt gt keys F2 to scroll horizontally and select the digit to be modified the selected digit changes to white on a black background Turn the navigation button to modify the digit To cancel the modification Press ESC To save the modification Press the navigation button ENT 20 Graphic display keypad Quick navigation If the Quick function is displayed above the F4 key you can gain quick access to a parameter from any screen Example RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot freq 60Hz Rated motor power 0 37 kW 0 5 HP Rated motor volt 206 V Rated mot current 1 0A Rated motor freq 60 0 Hz Press F4 to access the Quick screen which con
154. aded to the graphic display keypad or PowerSuite Not allowed ULr1 The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display keypad O or PowerSuite if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered Download rights Unlock drv dLr1 Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive Locked dLr0 A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an access code which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded O Unlock dLr1 A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the drive is unlocked access code entered or is not protected by an access code O Not allowed dLr2 Download not authorized Lock unlock dLr3 Combination of Locked drv dLrO and Unlock dLr1 Permitted ULrO 245 MONITORING CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation RUN Term 40 00Hz 80 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 6 2 MONITOR SCREE
155. ains connected to the power supply Power ON rdS probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected Motor ON rS probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected PTC2 probe No nO Can be accessed if a MT VW3A3202 option card has been inserted L1 No nO Not used Always probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply Power PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected Motor ON rS probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected 209 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Fault reset No nO Manual fault reset nO Function inactive 11 Li1 to LI6 Li6 LI7 Li7 to L110 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 00 to CD 13 Cd13 In profile IO can be
156. ameters Motor param MOt motor parameters see list below The following selections can only be accessed if Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl Comm menu The 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu without either Scan In1 address nMA1 to Scan In8 address 8 or Scan Out1 address 1 to Scan Out8 address nCA8 Prog card menu PLO the 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD menu Monitor config MOn the MONITORING CONFIG menu Display config 915 the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu See the multiple selection procedure on page 26 for the integrated display terminal and page 17 for the graphic display terminal Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty Goto FACTORY SETTINGS It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected With the integrated display terminal No Yes The parameter changes back to nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete With the graphic display terminal see previous page LI Save config Config 0 51 0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Config 1 Str0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Config 2 Str0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection For example if it is Config 0 510 only Config 1 S
157. an be assigned to each input EPr Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input 28 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC Comparison of the menus be accessed on graphic display keypad vs integrated display keypad Integrated display keypad Access level L RE Access level LE Ud Password 5 Simply start SUP Monitoring SEE Settings FE 5 Factory settings User menu A single function can be assigned to each input Basic b H 5 dr Motor control 1 0 configuration CEL Command F Un Application functions FLE Fault management Communication A single function be assigned to each input Standard 5 E d factory setting Advanced AdU Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert E Pr 29 Structure of parameter tables The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus can be used with both the graphic display keypad and the integrated display keypad They therefore contain information for these two keypads in accordance with the description below Example e 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory set
158. and 8 output 45 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups ALGr HMI Frequency ref LFr Internal ref HMI torque ref Ltr Multiplying coeff MFr Frequency ref FrH Torque reference trr Output frequency rFr Measured output fr MMF Pulse in work freq FqS Motor current LCr ENA avg speed AUS Motor speed SPd Motor voltage UOP Motor power OPr Motor torque Otr Mains voltage ULn Motor thermal state tHr Drv thermal state tHd DBR thermal state tHb Consumption APH Run time rtH Power on time PtH IGBT alarm counter tAC PID reference rPC PID feedback rPF PID error rPE PID Output rPO Date Time CLO Config active CnFS Utilised param set CFPS ALARMS ALr OTHER STATE SSt Current alarm group numbers in Hz Frequency reference via the graphic display keypad can be accessed if the function has been configured as a process value PID reference via graphic display keypad can be accessed if the function has been configured as a 96 of the rated torque Torque reference via graphic display keypad as a be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 130 has been assigned in Hz as a 96 of the rated torque can be accessed if the function has been configured in Hz
159. ard has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display keypad Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted Setting up the PID regulator 1 Configuration in PID mode See the diagram on page 166 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode in most cases this will be sufficient To optimize the drive adjust rPG or gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode without PID regulator and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system In steady state the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PID feedback signal must be stable In transient state the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PID feedback must follow the speed If this is not the case see the settings for the drive and or sensor signal and wiring Switch to PID mode Set brA to no no auto adaptation of the ramp Set the PID ramp PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an fault Set the integral
160. arting Motor overload Triggered by excessive motor current Check the setting of the motor thermal protection check the motor load Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting 1 output phase loss Loss of one phase at drive output Check the connections from the drive to the motor Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has been removed continued 3 motor phase loss Probable cause a nid Motor not connected or motor power too low Output contactor open Instantaneous instability in the motor current Check the connections from the drive to the motor If an output contactor is being used parameterize Output Phase Loss OPL Output cut OAC page 214 Test on a low power motor or without a motor In factory settings mode motor phase loss detection is active Output Phase Loss OPL Yes YES To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive in particular for high power drives deactivate motor phase loss detection Output Phase Loss OPL No nO Check and optimize the following parameters IR compensation UFr page 69 Rated motor volt UnS and Rated mot current nCr page 64 and perform Auto tuning tUn page 65 Mains overvoltage Line voltage too high Disturbance on power supply Check the line voltag
161. ause in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 217 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting UnderV fault mgt FIt amp R1open 0 Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage FIt amp R10pen 0 Fault and fault relay open FIt amp R1close 1 Fault and fault relay closed Alarm 2 Alarm and fault relay remains closed The alarm can be assigned to logic output or a relay According to drive According to drive voltage rating voltage rating 1 Mains voltage Rated voltage of the line supply in V For MT2eee 200V ac 200 200 Volts AC 220V ac 220 220 Volts AC 240V ac 240 240 Volts AC 260V ac 260 260 Volts AC factory setting For MT4eee 380V ac 380 380 Volts AC 400 ac 400 400 Volts AC 440V ac 440 440 Volts AC 460V ac 460 460 Volts AC 480V ac 480 480 Volts AC factory setting 00000 0000 1 Undervoltage level Undervoltage fault trip level setting in V The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value Undervolt time out oa Time delay for taking undervoltage fault into account 1 UnderV prevention Behavior in the event of the undervoltage fault prevention level being reached No n
162. brake release sequence is executed depends on the value selected for b0 brHO Run command Frequency b0 brHO 0 Relay or 4 logic output Frequency bEn b0 brHO 1 Relay or i logic output Note If a run command is requested during the ttr phase the complete brake control sequence is initialized b1 Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault 0 0 The brake contact in steady state fault is active fault if the contact is open during operation The brF brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases 1 1 The brake contact in steady state fault is inactive The brF brake contact fault is only monitored during the brake release and engage phases Handling 157 Lifts Hoisting 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting br He b2 0 Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence D 0 0 The brake contact is not taken into account 1 1 The brake contact is taken into account Use in open loop and closed loop mode Ifa logic input is assigned to the brake contact BRH b2 brH2 7 0 During the brake release sequence the reference is enabled at the end of the time Brake Release time brt During the brake engage sequence the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp
163. c display terminal MDB Integrated Modbus CAN Integrated CANopen NET Communication card Frequency reference Current in the motor 2 Menu line Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu 3 Menus submenus parameters values bar charts etc are displayed in drop down window format on a maximum of 5 lines The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in a highlighted curser 4 Section displaying the functions assigned to the F1 to F4 keys and aligned with them for example Code F1 HELP F1 Quick F4 Displays the code of the selected parameter the code corresponding to the 7 segment display Contextual help Navigate horizontally to the left or go to previous menu submenu or for a value go to the next digit up displayed in a highlighted curser see the example on page 17 Navigate horizontally to the right go to next menu submenu going to the 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu in this example or for a value go to the next digit down displayed in a highlighted curser see the example on page 17 Quick navigation see page 21 The function keys are dynamic and contextual Other functions application functions can be assigned to these keys via the 1 6 COMMAND menu 5 Indicates that there are no more levels below this display window wy Indicates that there are more levels below this display window Indicates that this d
164. c input It defines the positive or negative logic of the input assigned to the fault Active low LO Fault on falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned input Active high HIG Fault on rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input 4 External fault mgt Freewheel YES Type of stop in the event of an external fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 1 Bec
165. consecutive jog operations 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 57 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 5 2 Preset speed 2 0 to 1600 Hz YE See page 141 Preset speed 2 Preset speed 3 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 3 Preset speed 4 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 4 Preset speed 5 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 5 Preset speed 6 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 6 Preset speed 7 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 7 Preset speed 8 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 8 Preset speed 9 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 9 Preset speed 10 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 10 Preset speed 11 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 11 Preset speed 12 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 12 Preset speed 13 0 to 1600 Hz See page 141 Preset speed 13 0 to 1600 Hz Preset speed 14 See page 141 Preset speed 14 SPE 5 1 SPH 5
166. ctor control i R2 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R2 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R2 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging 4 Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 98 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R3 Assignment Identical to R2 R3 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
167. d parameters 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Adjustment of the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display keypad parameters stored in the keypad rather than in the drive 250 DISPLAY CONFIG If Return std name 7 Yes the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored RDY Term 0 00Hz PARAMETER SELECTION PARAMETER SELECTION 7 1 USER PARAMETERS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Selection of 1 to 15 parameters Return std name No MSIE UU Ramp increment to be customized PARAMETER SELECTION gt 11 2 MONITORING ENT Acceleration CUSTOMIZED SELECTION 1 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration USER MENU NAME 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 DEVICE NAME 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 SERVICE MESSAGE lt CONFIGURATION 0 lt CONFIGURATION 1 Note The 1 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or lt CONFIGURATION 2 RDY Term 0 00Hz Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List la SERIAL NUMBER D gt CUSTOMIZED SELECTION ENT List of customized parameters Acceleration Speed prop gain Delete RDY Term 0 00Hz OA RDY Term 0 00Hz If no custom settings have Ramp increment ENT User name been made the standard value appears names units etc User name 1 FLOW REFERENCE Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Nb characters max 13 Offsets and coefficients are Use F
168. d the navigation button is rotated to increase or decrease this number 17 Graphic display keypad First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu The first time the drive is powered up the user will automatically be guided through the menus as far as 1 DRIVE MENU The parameters in the 1 1 SIMPLY START submenu must be configured and auto tuning performed before the motor is started up MOTORTRONICS MT403U22N4 Displays for 3 seconds following power up 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config 1 3 seconds 5 LANGUAGE English Automatically switches to 5 LANGUAGE menu 3 seconds later Select the language and press ENT Chinese Switches to 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu see page 27 Select the access level and press ENT Switches to 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START see page 23 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ESC i Press ESC to return to MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 18 Graphic display keypad Subsequent power ups MOTORTRONICS MT403U22N4 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config n 1 3 seconds RDY Term 38Hz 0 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 38Hz 0 0 Frequency ref 38 Hz RDY Term 38 2 0 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS Switches to 1 DRIVE MENU 3 seconds later If no operator inputs are m
169. dV e Ire eo lt eo ON N NI N N 133 91 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI 1041NOO t1 335 SoONIL13S 1 DNINOLINOW uI 5 Code 95 d5P ECC ECE EF EFr IL En A EnS EnL EFL ETRO EEF Fed F5 FL51 FdE FFE FL FLU FLOC FLU FP 270 index parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 SONILL3S AXOL V4 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 61 774 LN3A39VNVMW LINVS 81 lO LO LONN a NI iO e gt 133 91 e gt 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI 1 1041NOO t1 335 S NILL3S 1 DNINOLINOW uI 5 LYVLS Code 95 Fr
170. deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time 1 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range 0 J End Dec round 132 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 Low speed Motor frequency at minimum reference be set between 0 and High speed 5 High speed boi Motor frequency at maximum reference can be set between Low speed LSP and Max frequency tFr IEH Mot therm current 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 2 to drive Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate 0 0 sim N Speed prop gain 0 to 100096 4096 Speed loop proportional gain z 0 0 s Speed time integral Vig 10002 108 Speed loop integral time constant ae K speed loop filter 0 to 100 0 Speed loop filter coefficient 1 In c
171. e PTC1 overheat Overheating of the PTC1 probes detected PTC2 overheat Overheating of the PTC2 probes detected LIG PTC overheat Overheating of PTC probes detected on input LI6 Check the motor load and motor size Check the motor ventilation Wait for the motor to cool before restarting Check the type and state of the PTC probes PTC1 probe PTC1 probes open or short circuited PTC2 probe PTC2 probes open or short circuited 6 probe PTC probes on input LI6 open or short circuited Check the PTC probes and the wiring between them and the motor drive IGBT short circuit Power component fault Perform a test via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Motor short circuit Short circuit at drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor s insulation Perform tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Modbus com Interruption in communication on the Modbus bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the Modbus User s Manual PowerSuite com Fault communicating with programming software Check the Comunications connecting cable Check the time out HMI com Fault communicating with the graphic display keypad Check the terminal connection Check the time out TORQUE TIME OUT FLT The time out of the torque control function is attai
172. e to 06 Not applicab le Config active CNFO 1 or 2 see page 194 can only be accessed if Display value type List Utilised param set SET1 2 or 3 see page 192 can only be accessed if Display value type List Select the parameter s using ENT then appears to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT PARAMETER SELECTION MONITORING Examples include Display of 2 digital values Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of 5 values RUN Term 35 00Hz 80 RUN Term 35 00 2 80 RUN Term 35 00Hz 80 Motor speed Min Motor speed max MONITORING 1250 rpm 1500 Frequency ref i 50 1Hz 1 2 90 rp m Motor current 80A Motor current i Motor current Motor speed 1250 rpm 80 A 80A Motor thermal state Drv thermal state 248 0 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Word 1 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 1 Format of word 1 Hex Hexadecimal Signed Decimal with sign Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 2 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and keys and rotating the navigation button
173. e LI JOG 1 LL LILIL Forward 4 1 L HI l ol Reverse 4 1 1 1 111 2 1 4 Jog frequency 1 01010 Hz The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Reference in jog operation Jog delay 1 0102 05 The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 138 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Preset speeds 2 4 8 or 16 speeds can be preset requiring 1 2 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively Note You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds You must configure 2 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds You must configure 2 4 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds Combination table for preset speed inputs 16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference LI PS16 LI PS8 LI PS4 LI PS2 0 0 0 0 Reference 1 0 0 0 1 SP2 0 0 1 0 SP3 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 1 0 0 SP5 0 1 0 1 SP6 0 1 1 0 SP7 0 1 1 1 SP8 1 0 0 0 SP9 1 0 0 1 SP10 1 0 1 0 SP11 1 0 1 1 SP12 1 1 0 0 SP13 1 1 0 1 SP14 1 1 1 0 SP15 1 1 1 1 SP16 1 See the diagram on page 112 Reference 1 SP1 139 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn
174. e diagram on 112 For improved clarity we will call this reference A The action of the speed and speed buttons can be set as of this reference A On stopping the reference A speed is not saved so the drive restarts with reference A only The maximum total reference is always limited by High speed HSP and the minimum reference by Low speed LSP see page 40 Example of 2 wire control Acceleration 2 AC2 Motor frequency SrP Deceleration 2 dE2 Reference SrP 1 4 L 2 LSP LSP SrP 1 1 Reference A SP oT 1 l 1 1 Reverse 144 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI speed assignment O No nO Function inactive LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 LI Speed assignment L1 No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 118 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Speed limitation 0 to 50 96 10 96 This parameter limits the variation range with speed as a 96 of the reference The ramps used in this function are Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 d
175. e limitation No 4 preset No ref LI6 2 wire No Fault reset No No No No No 3 wire Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop LI2 3 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI3 3 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI4 3 wire 2 preset speeds Jog Fault reset PID integral Ref 2 Trq spd reset switching switching LI5 3 wire No 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset Fault reset Fault reset ref 116 3 wire No 8 preset speeds Torque limitation 4 preset No ref Option cards 40 14 No No No No No No No LO1 to LO4 No No No No No No No R3 R4 No No No No No No No Al4 No No No No No No No RP No No No No No No No AO2 motor I motor motor motor motor motor motor AO3 No Sign torque No Sign torque PID Output No Motor freq Graphic display terminal keys F1 key No No No No No Control No via graphic display terminal F2 FA No No No No No No No keys In 3 wire control the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts 34 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Other configurations and settings In addition to the assignment of inputs outputs other parameters are assigned
176. e selected channels 253 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz OA 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Contrast Keypad stand by Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 254 MULTIPOINT SCREEN Communication is possible between a graphic display keypad and a number of drives connected on the same bus The addresses of the drives must be configured in advance in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu using the Modbus Address Add parameter page 233 When a number of drives are connected to the same display keypad the terminal automatically displays the following screens CONNECTION IN PROGRESS VXXXXXX MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES Selection of drives for multipoint dialog select each address and check the box by Address 1 pressing ENT Address 2 This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up or if the Cfg Add 2 function key the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed see below ress Address 5 Address 6 ESC MULTIPOINT SCREEN Rdy 0 Rpm 0A 2 Motor speed Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog 952 Rp 1500 1250A 4 952 rpm Not connected 5 Motor current Rdy 0 Rpm 6 1 0 1 Gig Add Cfg Add In multipoint mode the command channel is not displayed From left to right the state then the 2 selected parameters and finally the drive address appear All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode Only drive control
177. e slack The rope slack function can be used to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set down ready for lifting but the rope or cable is still slack as illustrated below Speed rz D ANS OSP Load 4 The speed step OSP parameters described 162 is used to measure the load The effective measurement cycle will not be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold rStL which corresponds to the weight of the hook A logic output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the rope slack state in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 164 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting High speed hoisting O No nO Function inactive O Speed ref SSO Speed reference mode I Limit CSO Current limitation mode 0 to 100 Motor speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Ascending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO 7 Speed ref SSO 0 to 100 Gen speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO 0 1sto 65s Load measuring tm Duration of speed step for measurement The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO
178. e zero speed has been reached If a speed other than zero is then required the command to release the brake is sent following torque application No nO Brake does not engage at regulated zero speed 0 0 to 30 0 s Brake engage delay once zero speed is reached 1 0to 5 00 s 0 Brake engage delay Time delay before request to engage brake To delay brake engagement if you wish the brake to be engaged when the drive comes to a complete stop to 5 00 5 Brake engage time 1 Brake engage time brake response time Auto DC inj level 1 1 Level of standstill DC injection current Note The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 154 is Traveling HOr CAUTION that the motor will withstand this current without overheating e to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 155 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn 1 Engage at reversal L1 No nO The brake does not engage Yes YES The brake engages Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed wh
179. ed macro CCFG disappears Note The factory settings that appear in the parameter tables correspond to Macro configuration Start Stop 515 This is the macro configuration set at the factory 35 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Example diagrams for use with the macro configurations Hoisting HSt diagram Forward Reverse 111 1 x NE 12 13 LM 24 12 MT Series cas U V 4 Electromagnetic brake 1 A contact on the auxilliary safety relay must be inserted in the brake control circuit to engage it safely when the Power Removal safety function is activated see connection diagrams in the Installation Manual Mast slave MSL diagram Speed Torque Forward Reverse 9 Forward Reverse LM 24 12 LM 12 424 MT Serieseeee m MT Serieseeee Master drive Slave drive 1 When the two motors are mechanically connected the Speed torque contact closing results in operation in Mast slave mode The master drive regulates the speed and controls the slave drive in torque mode to ensure distribution of the load 36 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ECE 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C ec O 2 wire 2 JC 3 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which contr
180. ed when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions Auto tuning which causes the motor to start up The adjustment parameters on page 40 Note The parameters of the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu must be entered in the order in which they appear as the later ones are dependent on the first ones For example 2 3 wire control ECC must be configured before any other parameters The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu should be configured on its own or before the other drive configuration menus If a modification has previously been made to any of them in particular in 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC some 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM parameters may be changed for example the motor parameters if a synchronous motor has been selected Returning to the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu after modifying another drive configuration menu is unnecessary but does not pose any risk Changes following modification of another configuration menu are not described to avoid unnecessary complication in this section Macro configuration Macro configuration provides a means of speeding up the configuration of functions for a specific field of application 7 macro configurations are available Start stop factory configuration Handling General use Hoisting PID regulator Communication bus Master slave Selecting a macro configuration assigns the parameters in this macro configuration Each macro configura
181. eel nSt When the assigned input changes to 0 the stop is controlled in accordance with the selected type Restarting is only authorized for the other operating direction once the motor has stopped If the two inputs Stop FW limit sw LAF and Stop RV limit sw LAr are assigned and at state 0 restarting will be impossible The parameter can be accessed if Stop FW limit sw LAF or Stop RV limit sw LAr is assigned 149 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Brake logic control Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications and for unbalanced machines Principle Vertical hoisting movement Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing in order to hold the load start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged Horizontal movement Synchronize brake release with the build up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping to prevent jolting Recommended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of control of the load being lifted Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 Brake impulse bIP YES Ensure that the direction of rotation
182. ement 208 to ia E IGBT tests 218 B B E B Catch a spinning load 212 B Braking resistor thermal protection 228 E m m Motor protection with PTC probes 208 il m Ei B El m Undervoltage management 218 EB 4 20mA loss 220 m Uncontrolled output cut output phase loss 214 BE Automatic restart 211 Use ofthe Pulse input input to measure the speed of 224 a rotation of the motor Load variation detection 226 11 Setup Preliminary recommendations Turning on and configuring the drive A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Before turning on and configuring the MT Series check that the PWR POWER REMOVAL input is deactivated programmed to 0 in order to prevent unintended operation Before turning on the drive or when exiting the configuration menus check that the inputs assigned to the run command are deactivated programmed to 0 since they can cause the motor to start immediately Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE Before turning on and configuring the drive ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown on the drive nameplate The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Separate control section power supply When the drive control section is powered independently of t
183. en the operating direction is reversed Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Jump at reversal 1 0 to 10 0 Hz Auto AUtO The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 154 is Hoisting UEr Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control When the reference direction is reversed this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque and consequential release of load on transition to zero speed Parameter is not applicable if Engage at reversal bEd 7 Yes YES Time to restart 1 0 to 5 00 s 0 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 156 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Brake control logic expert parameters Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting b0 Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging 0 0 The engage release sequence is executed in full 1 1 The brake is released immediately Use in open loop and closed loop mode Arun command may be requested during the brake engagement phase Whether or not the
184. erence or Reference A Fri or Fr1b see page 113 Combination table for preset PID references LI Pr4 LI Pr2 Pr2 nO Reference or A 0 0 or A 1 rP2 1 0 rP3 1 1 rP4 A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process 166 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Scaling of feedback and references PIF1 PIF2 parameters Can be used to scale the PID feedback sensor range This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters PIP1 PIP2 parameters Can be used to scale the adjustment range i e the reference The adjustment range MUST lie within the sensor range The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32767 To facilitate installation we recommend using values as close as possible to this maximum level while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values Example see graph below Adjustment of the volume in a tank between 6 m and 15 m Sensor used 4 20 mA 4 5 m for 4 mA 20 m for 20 mA with the result that PIF1 4500 and PIF2 20000 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m with the result that PIP1 6000 min reference and PIP2 15000 max reference Example references rP1 internal reference 9500 rp2 preset reference 6500 rP3 preset reference 8000 preset reference 11200 The DISPLAY CONFIG menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its format
185. es Torque YES limitation via AL Al analog input T NE O EE RP RP or Encoder PG Encoder je nO LI Torque ref assign tAA 178 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Torque limit activ No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function always active L114 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active LJ Torque increment 1 1 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ tLA No nO Selection of units for the Motoring torque lim torque lim 116 parameters 0 196 0 1 unit 0 1 1 1 unit 1 2 Motoring torque lim 1 0 to 300 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in motor mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter Gen torque lim 0 ML 1998 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in generator mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter _ Torque ref assign No nO I
186. es rated above 18 5 kW 25 HP Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power and voltage as well as a suitably dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor Consult Schneider Electric for information about specifying these components The direct power supply via DC bus function can be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay or a logic input on the drive Example circuit using R2 relay Contactor power supply Y A1 A2 cO ce cm eei Lo e 5 8 22 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting No nO Precharge cont ass Logic output or control relay L1 No nO Function not assigned LO1 101 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to 102 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 401 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment AO1 page 105 No nO 206 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Using graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A ENT 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
187. escription Adjustment range Factory setting 1 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input in order to check for example for compatibility problems i Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 100 Positive voltage input negative values are interpreted as zero the input is unidirectional O Voltage n10U Positive and negative voltage input the input is bidirectional min value 0 to 10 0 V 1 max value 0 to 10 0 V 1 AM filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering Interm point X 0 to 10096 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to min value UIL1 100 corresponds to max value UIH1 2 Interm point Y 0 to 10096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 88 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Al2 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al2 in order to check for example for compatibility problems Al2 Type O Voltage 10U Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input Current 0 A Al2 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type AI2t Current 0 A Al2 min value 00 10 0 V T
188. f the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to O LJ Encoder check time 210 10s 2s Encoder faults filtering time The parameter can be accessed if Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES Trq I limit stop Ignore nO Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 limit time
189. f the function is assigned the limitation varies between 096 and 300 of the rated torque on the basis of the 096 to 10096 signal applied to the assigned input Examples 12mA on a 4 20 mA input results in limitation to 15096 of the rated torque 25V ona 10 V input results in 75 of the rated torque nO Not assigned function inactive to Analog input if MT VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via Al net channel AIC1 page 92 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 234 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 179 1 APPLICATION FUn Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 180 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Current limit 2 L1 No nO Function inactive L114 L11
190. flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment page 154 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect No nO Fluxing assignment No nO Function inactive LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 Assignment is only possible if Motor fluxing FLU is not Continuous FCt n Not cont FnC mode Ifan LI ora bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1 Ifan LI or a bit has not been assigned or if the LI or bit assigned is 0 when a run command is sent fluxing occurs when the motor starts In No FnO mode Ifan bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1 and is suppressed when the assigned input or bit is at O 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 147 1 APPLICATION
191. function is inactive the PID integral is enabled If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active the PID integral is disabled 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display keypad is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 171 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ocess Pr L1 L1 EI EJ EJ EJ EI DJ EJ EI EI P1 LI Speed ref assign PID regulator predictive speed input nO Not assigned function inactive Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Speed input 1 1 to 10096 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input The parameter cannot be accessed if Speed ref assign No
192. gned input or bit is at 1 N Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold Frt gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 05 Deceleration 2 Time to decelerate from Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold Frt gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned Yes YES 1 Dec ramp adapt Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load which can cause an overvoltage fault nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active for applications that do not require strong deceleration The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and Motor control type Ctt page 66 They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with Yes YES Use comparative testing to determine your selection High torq A dYnA High B dYnb High C aYnC Dec ramp adapt brA is forced to No nO if the brake logic control Brake assignment is assigned page 154 or if Braking balance bbA page 79 Yes YES The factory se
193. gnment pressing ENT has no effect and the message continues to flash It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC 127 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier Fr1 or Frib 34 SA2 dA3 MA2 A Fr1 or Frib SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x If SA2 dA2 dA3 not assigned they are set to 0 If MA2 are not assigned they are set to 1 A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters For multiplication the signal on MA2 or is interpreted as a 96 10096 corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding input If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display keypad an MFr multiplication variable page 46 must be sent via the bus or graphic display keypad Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited see page 119 128 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A Ref 1B switching ch active Fr1 See the diagrams on pages 112 and 113 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1 channel Fr1 active ch1B active Fr1b no switching Ref 1B channel Fr1b active LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active see page
194. he factory setting assignment D Instructions Fr1 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr1b for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr1b for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 terminals SA2 5 dA2 Terminals only Fr2 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card and speed 1 Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu 113 1 06 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Not separ SIM configuration Reference and command not separate The command channel is determined by the reference channel Parameters Fr1 Fr2 rFC FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example if the reference is Fr1 11 analog input at the terminals control is via LI logic input at the terminals LI nO 12 Ref 1 channel 15 LCCH RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display keypad LI Profile T Forced local Ref 2 switching EE nO SIM Forward STOP Graphic display keypad Stop Key priority F
195. he fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop Fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed at the time the fault occurred as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 227 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DB res protection No nO No braking resistor protection thereby preventing access to the other function parameters O Alarm YES Alarm The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay see page 97 O Fault FLt Switch to fault with locking of drive freewheel stop Note The thermal state of the resistor can be displayed on the graphic display It is calculated for as long as the drive control remains connected to the power supply 2 DB Resistor Power This parameter can be accessed
196. he fault in order to correct it The drive is unlocked after a fault By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely then switching on again Automatically in the scenarios described for the AUTOMATIC RESTART Atr function page 211 By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the FAULT RESET rSt function page 210 By pressing the STOP RESET button on the graphic display keypad Menu 1 2 MONITORING SUP This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive state and its current values It can be accessed with the integrated display keypad Spares and repairs Consult Motortronics for product support 256 Faults Causes Remedies Drive does not start no fault displayed If the display does not light up check the power supply to the drive The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up The MT Series then displays Freewheel nSt in freewheel stop and Fast stop FSt in fast stop This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a loose wire Make sure that the run command input or inputs are activated in accordance with the selected control mode 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt parameters page 83 f an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at ze
197. he graphs below illustrate the various operating scenarios with and without the function Frequency 4 Standard floor A Slowdown limit switch reached B Stop limit switch reached Slowdown frequency 1 Noo Distance B 7 l Frequency 4 Half floor without function l Slowdown frequency t icm Distance Frequency Half floor with function Half fl eed HLS The function is only activated if when the slowdown limit P switch is tripped the motor frequency is less than Half floor speed HLS Acceleration is then maintained up to this value Slowdown prior to slowing down frequency The final part of the path is identical to that of the standar Distance floor B Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 Half floor speed op Une Activation and adjustment of the half floor function This function has priority over all speed reference functions preset speeds for example with the exception of those generated via fault monitoring fallback speed for example No nO Function inactive 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Activation of the function by adjusting the motor frequency to be reached prior to slowing down 205 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Direct power supply via DC bus This function is only accessible for MT driv
198. he parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Voltage 100 2 max value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Current 0 2 max value 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Voltage 100 Al2 filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering 2 range O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input corresponds to reference 100 corresponds to reference 0 10 V corresponds to reference 10096 0 100 POS 12 Interm point X 0 to 100 Input delinearization point coordinate 096 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 gt 100 Max value Min value 096 corresponds to 2 if the range is 10096 gt 100 10096 corresponds to Max value Al2 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 89 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input AI3 in order to check for example for compatibility problems AI3 Type Current 0 A Read only parameter cannot be configured Current 0 A Current input 1 AI3 min value 0 to 20 0 mA
199. he parameters that are specific to communication cards Card removed or replaced by a different type of card card Drive menu drM Encoder card Drive menu drM Communication card Drive menu drM and parameters specific to communication cards Control card changed Check the voltage and the parameters of UNDERVOLTAGE MGT USb page 218 When a control card is replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been intentionally changed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes all the factory settings to be restored 262 User settings tables Menu 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name 2 3 wire control Factory setting 2 wire 2C Customer setting Macro configuration Start Stop StS Standard mot freq 60 Hz 60 Rated motor power According to drive rating Rated motor volt According to drive rating Rated mot current According to drive rating Rated motor freq 60 Hz Rated motor speed According to drive rating Max frequency 60 Hz Output Ph rotation ABC Mot therm current According to drive rating Acceleration 3 0s Deceleration 3 0s Low speed 0 Functions assigned to High speed
200. he power section P24 and OV terminals whenever an option card is added or replaced only the power section must be supplied with power next time the drive is powered up By default the new card would not be recognized and it would be impossible to configure it thereby causing the drive to lock in fault mode Power switching via line contactor CAUTION Avoid operating the contactor frequently premature ageing of the filter capacitors Cycle times 60 s may result in damage to the pre charge resistor Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage User adjustment and extension of functions The display unit and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages Return to factory settings is made easy by the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu see page 238 There are three types of parameters Display Values displayed by the drive Adjustment Can be changed during operation or when stopped Configuration Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place Can be displayed during operation A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 12 Setup Preliminary recommendations Sta
201. hines Textiles weaving looms carding frames washing machines spinners drawing frames Wood automatic lathes saws milling High inertia centrifuges mixers unbalanced machines beam pumps presses Process Each machine has its own special features and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor exhaustive Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application In this case the application is identified by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages Motor control functions Applications Functions Page V f ratio 66 Sensorless flux vector control 66 m m El El Flux vector control with sensor 66 El m m 2 point vector control 66 m ES Open loop synchronous motor 66 m Output frequency of up to 1600 Hz 64 m Motor overvoltage limiting DC bus connection see User s Manual m Motor fluxing using a logic input 147 m m Switching frequency of up to 16 kHz 76 Auto tuning 65 m E m E Application functions Functions on speed references Applications Functions Page Differential bipolar reference 85 Bl Reference delinearization magnifying glass effect 87 Frequency control input 119 Reference switching 123 129 Reference summing 128 B Reference subtraction 128 Bi Reference m
202. il the machine speed drops When this point is reached increase the integral gain until the machine speed stabilizes Use the graphic display keypad or an oscilloscope to check that the DC bus voltage is stable To save energy Reducing the proportional gain gradually may increase energy savings by reducing the maximum value of the line current but it will increase speed variations and therefore mechanical stress The aim is to identify settings that will enable energy to be saved and minimize mechanical stress When reducing the proportional gain it may be necessary to readjust the integral gain in order to avoid an overvoltage trip Note Once the adjustments are complete check that the pump starts up correctly If the ENA integral gain setting is too low this may lead to insufficient torque on startup Reduction ratio This setting corresponds to the motor speed ahead of gearbox speed after gearbox ratio This parameter is used to display the average speed in Hz and the machine speed in customer units e g in strokes per minute on the graphic display keypad In order to be displayed on the graphic display these values must be selected in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu 74 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 75 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL
203. in Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted and configured in speed feedback mode otherwise 0 appears in Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 225 in A in Hz The parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA Yes YES see page 75 in rpm in V as a of the rated power as a 96 of the rated torque in V Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped as a as a as a can only be accessed on high rating drives in Wh kWh or MWh accumulated consumption in seconds minutes or hours length of time the motor has been switched on in seconds minutes or hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured in Hz can be accessed if the PID function has been configured Current date and time Active configuration Config n 0 1 or 2 Set n 1 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 192 List of current alarms If an alarm is present a J appears List of secondary states In motor fluxing FLX In motor fluxing PTC1 alarm PtC1 Probe alarm 1 PTC
204. in SPG Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms 53 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 ENA prop gain 1 to 9999 250 See page 75 m ME ENA integral gain 0 to 9999 100 See page 75 LJ IR compensation 25 to 200 100 See page 69 S Slip compensation 0 to 300 100 See page 69 Ramp divider 0 to 10 4 See page 134 DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 1 0 64 In 1 See page 135 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 DC injection time 1 NOUS 135 Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 mr 0 1 In 2 to DC inject 0 5 In 1 DC inject level 2 level 1 IdC See page 135 Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2
205. in progress this distance will not be observed If the direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the parameters configured are consistent in particular you should check that the required distance is possible This function does not replace the stop limit switch which remains necessary for safety reasons Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 188 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Li Stop FW limit sw No nO Not assigned 4 L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 L to L110 1110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 1 to L114 1114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 Not applicable CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile IO can be switched without logic inputs 0000000000 4 Stop RV limit sw No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above
206. ing a parameter in this document The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided With the integrated display keypad Direct use of the parameter code index page 266 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter With the graphic display keypad Select the required parameter and press F1 Code The parameter code is displayed instead of its name while the key is held down Example ACC RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 3 SETTINGS 9 51s Acceleration ACC Deceleration Deceleration 9 67s Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Code lt lt Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Code lt lt gt gt Then use the parameter code index page 266 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter 32 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Using graphic display keypad use this approach for fast and easy setup RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 2 3 wire control 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 3 SETTINGS 4 PASSWORD 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 5 LANGUAGE 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Using integrated display keypad Power up xxx Displays the state of the drive The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu can used for fast startup which is sufficient for the majority of applications The parameters in this menu can only be modifi
207. inue In this case the download is possible but the parameters will be restricted 242 5 OPEN SAVE 5 DOWNLOAD GROUP None No parameters All All parameters in all menus Drive menu The entire 1 DRIVE MENU Motor parameters Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS UO UO to U5 U5 F1 F1 to F5 F5 V constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP The motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode page 70 in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Mot therm current ItH in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Communication All the parameters in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu Prog control inside card Not applicable 243 4 PASSWORD With graphic display keypad Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Unlocked With integrated display keypad Power up
208. ions can be used at the same time It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at Advanced AdU and Expert EPr levels Before assigning a command reference or function to an input or output the user must make sure that this input or output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible or undesirable function The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions which may prevent other functions being assigned It may be necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable another Check the compatibility table below 124 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Compatibility table Sj A G A 3 P 8 lt 4 1 9 8 5 9 o gt 15 9 18 P D m o o a e o ps gt o 2 G gl o o a amp 8j e 2 o 5 amp miis 5 fo S 19 5 5 S 5 12 5 gt 3 gt 51212 4 ls 818 4 18 5 2 g Eo m9 c o o 9 v 2 2 5 1 5 9 s 2 l lo 8 Sis E o 5 9 8 2 8 15 2
209. isplay window does not scroll further up Indicates that there are more levels above this display window 15 Graphic display keypad Drive state codes ACC Acceleration CLI Current limit CTL Controlled stop on input phase loss DCB DC injection braking in progress DEC Deceleration FLU Motor fluxing in progress FST Fast stop NLP No line power no line supply on L1 L2 L3 NST Freewheel stop OBR Auto adapted deceleration PRA Power Removal function active drive locked RDY Drive ready RUN Drive running SOC Controlled output cut in progress TUN Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm 16 Graphic display keypad Example configuration windows RDY Term 0 00Hz When only one selection is possible the selection made is indicated by 5 LANGUAGE Example Only one language can be chosen English Chinese When multiple selection is possible the selections made are indicated by 1 3 SETTINGS Example A number of parameters can be chosen to form the USER MENU Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Example configuration window for one value RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Acceleration Acceleration E51s 93 s Max 99 99 Min 0 01 Max 99 99 The lt lt and gt gt arrows keys F2 and are used to select the digit to be modified an
210. ity Check the wiring Check the time out Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive CANopen com Interruption in communication on the CANopen bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the CANopen User s Manual External flt LI Bit Fault triggered by an external device depending on user Check the device which caused the fault and reset External fault com Fault triggered by a communication network Check for the cause of the fault and reset Out contact open The output contactor remains open although the closing conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit input contactor The drive is not turned on even though Mains V time out LCt has elapsed Check the contactor and its wiring Check the time out Check the line contactor drive connection Al2 4 20mA loss AI3 4 20mA loss Al4 4 20mA loss Loss of the 4 20 mA reference on analog input Al2 or Al4 Check the connection on the analog inputs Overbraking Braking too sudden or driving load Increase the deceleration time Install a braking resistor if necessary Activate the Dec ramp adapt brA function page 133 if it is compatible with the application Drive overheat Drive temperature too high Check the motor load the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature Wait for the drive to cool down before rest
211. ive not faulty relay normally energized and de energized if there is a fault Drv running rUn Drive running Freq Th attain FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 62 HSP attain FLA High speed attained I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 61 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att 15 Motor 1 thermal state attained PID error al PEE PID error alarm PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm AI2 Al 4 20 AP2 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 62 Th drv att tAd Drive thermal state attained Rope slack rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config parameter rSd page 165 High tq att ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 61 Low tq att Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 61 Forward MFrd Motor in forward rotation Reverse MrrS Motor in reverse rotation Th mot2 att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 153 Motor 3 thermal state attained Neg Torque AtS Negative torque braking Cnfg 0 act CnF0 Configuration 0 active Cnfg 1 act CnF1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2
212. l increases in size The dtF value corresponds to time tbO Once this time has elapsed the reference continues to fall following the same ramp If low speed LSP is at 0 the speed reaches 0 Hz the drive stops and must be reset by a new run command If low speed LSP is not 0 the traverse control function continues to operate above LSP Motor speed Base reference 4 With LSP 0 0 d tbO Motor speed Base reference With LSP gt 0 LSP 198 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn e rtr Init traverse Reinitialize traverse control This command can be assigned to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit It resets the EbO alarm and the EbOt operating time to zero and reinitializes the reference to the base reference As long as rtr remains at 1 the traverse control function is disabled and the speed remains the same as the base reference This command is used primarily when changing reels Motor speed Base reference 199 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Anti Oscillation Master drive Slave drive Reel of yarn Synchronization Gearbox Main shaft Winding motor Thread guide N Thread Gearbox o
213. loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 5 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage 150 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Brake logic control horizontal movement in open loop mode Frequency e c e e 01 o uonoefu gt 2 o LL 5 6 9 5 H 4 4 5 2 8 _ 3 fy LE igh 6 L nbio 1 F PRENNE AN EN s EN xnld i Twas I ee pog I p d 1 1 1 4 p 4 P 1 al T O 9 5 a 85 o xO o G o 9 E 5 9 9 5 5 9 5 9 8 25 5 St S 98 5 9 5 5 8 26 u m 5 o iL a 6 w LI gt d bEn Brake engage freq bEt Brake engage time brt Brake Release time Ibr Brake release FW SdC1
214. m link Code Quick 80A RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 CURRENT FAULT LIST internal com link Code Quick RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 MORE FAULT INFO Network fault Application fault Internal link fault 1 Internal link fault 2 Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT ENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION ENT 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS E 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 internal com link Drive state ETA status word ETI status word Cmd word Motor current HELP Quick Output frequency Elapsed time Line voltage ENT Motor thermal state Command Channel Channel ref active This screen indicates the number of communication faults for example with the option cards Number from 0 to 65535 This screen indicates the state of the drive at the moment the selected fault occurred 235 1 10 DIAGNOSTICo THYRISTORS TEST is only accessible for MT drive rated above 18 5 kW 25 HP RDY Term 50 00Hz RDY Term 50 00Hz OA RDY Term 50 00Hz OA TEST PROCEDURES ENT THYRISTORS TEST ENT TEST INPROGRESS THYRISTORS TEST TRANSISTOR TEST 2s ENT to perform the test gt ESC to cancel Term 50 0
215. magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor n Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up n Not cont FnC mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment DLC page 154 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect Low speed time out 0 to 999 9 s 0s Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 40 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor will restart if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time Note If Low speed time out tL S is not 0 Type of stop Stt page 134 is forced to Ramp stop rMP only if a ramp stop can be configured 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz LI Jog frequency See page 138 Reference in jog operation g Jog delay 0 to 2 0 s See page 138 Anti repeat delay between 2
216. mation to be displayed Drive reference power rating and voltage Drive software version Drive serial number Type of options present with their software version 237 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS With graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz OA 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS MAIN MENU ENT 1 11 IDENTIFICATION ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS Macro Conf 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 13 USER MENU 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE With integrated display keypad Power up The 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu is used to Replace the current configuration with the factory configuration or a previously saved configuration All or part of the current configuration can be replaced select a group of parameters in order to select the menus you wish to load with the selected source configuration Save the current configuration to a file 238 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS RUN Term 1250A 50 00 2 RUN Term 1250A 50 00Hz Selection of source configuration 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS Config Source a FACTORY SETTINGS ENT Config source Macro Conf PARAMETER GROUP LIST Goto FACTORY SETTINGS RUN Term 125
217. measurement Auto tuning Special motor or motor whose power is Check that the motor drive are compatible not suitable for the drive Motor not connected to the drive Check that the motor is present during auto tuning If an output contactor is being used close it during auto tuning 259 Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has been removed These faults can also be reset by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 210 APF CnF COF EPF1 EPF2 FCF2 LFF2 LFF3 LFF4 ObF OHF OLF OPF1 OPF2 OSF OtF1 OtF2 OtFL PHF PtF1 PtF2 PtFL SLF1 SLF2 SLF3 SrF SSF and tJF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 221 Application fault Probable cause Controller Inside card fault Contact factory Brake control Brake release current not reached Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage freq bEn only regulated when brake logic control is assigned Check the drive motor connection Check the motor windings Check the Brake release FW Ibr and Brake release Rev Ird settings page 154 Apply the recommended settings for Brake engage freq bEn Com network Communication fault on communication card Check the environment electromagnetic compatibil
218. mes the rated motor torque Torque lim tqL Torque limit between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Motor volt UOP Voltage applied to the motor between 0 and Rated motor volt UnS dO 1 401 Assignment to a logic output This assignment can only appear if 001 assignment 401 page 102 has been assigned This is the only possible choice in this case and is only displayed for informational purposes AO1 Type Current 0A Voltage 100 Voltage output Current 0A Current output AO1 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Current AO1 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Current 0 AO1 min Output 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t 7 Voltage 10U AO1 max Output 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Voltage 100 105 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 106 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AO2 assignment No nO Same assignments as 1 without dO 1 dO 1 AO2 Type Current 0A O Voltage 100 Voltage output Current 0A Current output O Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output AO2 min Output 0 to 20
219. minals remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel Cg Note The integrated Modbus channel has 2 physical communication ports The Modbus network port The Modbus HMI port The drive does not differentiate between these two ports but recognizes the graphic display keypad irrespective of the port to which it is connected 111 1 6 COMMAND CtL Reference channel for Not separ SIM Separate SEP and profile IO configurations PID not configured Ref 1B switching Ref 1 channel oy nO F 557 Preset Note Forced local is not Fr lt i 2 active I O profile 1 Ref 1B channel X AI3 Summing ref 2 no LFr an gt Graphic display 1 Summing ref 3 l H i keypad Lec SA ES 5 2 l Subtract ref 2 LI Y SP16 Subtract ref 3 2 og id operation I Multiplier ref 2 o l Multiplier ref 3 lt HH3 speed around reference PID REGULATOR nO c LI PID not assigned 5 IH lo La 1 nO Ref 2 channel 8 Low speed Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter The black square repre
220. n Synchronous motor parameters Type of thermal protection Thermal state The auto tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode Type of motor control Note No other menus or parameters can switched 194 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Switching command Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration 2 or 3 the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs The table below lists the possible combinations LI LI Number of configuration 2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motor 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 1 2 Schematic diagram for multimotor mode Configuration 0 Configuration 1 if the 2 contacts are open Configuration 2 Auto tuning in multimotor mode This auto tuning can be performed Manually using a logic input when the motor changes e Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 19 time after switching on the drive if the Automatic autotune parameter on page 65 Yes YES Motor thermal states in multimotor mode The drive protects the three motors individually Each thermal state takes into account all stop times including drive shutdowns It is therefore not necessary to perform auto tuning every time the power is switched on It is sufficient to auto tune each motor at least once Configuration information output In the 1 5 INPUTS
221. n be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 136 is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 66 mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 2 010306 219 standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 136 7 Yes YES Operation Note When Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 tdC2 are not accessible Only Auto DC inj time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time tdC1 tdC2 t Run command Speed 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate 55 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting g Switching freq According to rating According to rating Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive MT Series the rating and the configuration of the Sinus filter and Motor surge limit SUL
222. n network The operating modes specific to communication state chart The interaction between communication and local control Manual for Modbus This manual describes the assembly connection to the bus or network signaling diagnostics and configuration of the communication specific parameters via the graphic display keypad oteps Tor setting up the Drive PROGRAMMING 2 Power up without run command you are using a separate power supply for the control section follow the instructions on page 12 3 Select the language amp mnead sans d m4 Configure the SIMPLY START 5 IN menu H 2 wire or 3 wire control Macro configuration Motor parameters 9 Perform an auto tuning operation O Motor thermal current Acceleration and deceleration ramps Speed variation range Before you start programming complete the user setting tables page 267 Perform an auto tuning operation to optimize performance page 39 f you get lost return to the factory settings page 240 Note Check that the wiring of the drive is compatible with its configuration 5 Start Factory contiguration Drive factory settings The MT Series is factory set for the most common operating conditions Macro configuration Start Stop Motor frequency 60 Hz Constant torque application with sensorless flux vector control Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp
223. ned Check the function s settings Check the state of the mechanism Torque current lim Switch to torque limitation Check if there are any mechanical problems Check the parameters of TORQUE LIMITATION tLA page 179 and the parameters of the TORQUE OR I DETECT tld fault page 223 IGBT overheat Drive overheated Check the size of the load motor drive Reduce the switching frequency Wait for the motor to cool before restarting 261 Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset as soon as the cause has been removed The USF fault be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign INH parameter page 221 Incorrect config Probable cause Option card changed or removed Control card replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating The current configuration is inconsistent Check that there are no card errors In the event of the option card being changed removed intentionally see the remarks below Check that there are no card errors In the event of the control card being changed intentionally see the remarks below Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration if it is valid see page 240 Invalid config Invalid configuration The configuration loaded in the drive via the bus or communication network is inconsistent Check the configurati
224. nnels Fr1 Fr1b and Fr2 Cmd channel 1 Cdl Note Forced local is not active in I O profile LI Profile s 0 local Cmd switching O T nO CMD Forward gt Reverse STOP nO Graphic display STOP YES keypad Stop Key priority E d Ej Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile 1 Commands 1 2 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card 116 1 06 COMMAND CtL Command channel for profile IO configuration Selection of a command channel A command or an action can be assigned To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit Byselecting e g LI3 this action will always be triggered by LI3 regardless of which command channel is switched Byselecting e g C214 this action will always be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command channel is switched To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit By selecting e g CD11 this action will be triggered by LI12 if the terminals channel is active C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active C211 if the integrated CANopen channel is active C311 if the communication card channel is active If the active channel is the graphic display keyp
225. nstance there is no restriction which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown QA WN Forward stop zone k Forward stop SS 187 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has been traveled after the slowdown limit switch On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is tripped the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance This function is useful in applications where one manual reset overtravel limit switch is common to both directions It will then only respond to ensure safety if the distance is exceeded The stop limit switch retains priority in respect of the function The Deceleration type dSF parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described below Frequency Deceleration type dSF Standard Std Frequency Slowdown frequency Distance B d A Slowdown limit switch reached B Automatic stop at a distance Stop distance Std gt Deceleration type dSF Optimized OPt Slowdown frequency Distance gt Note If deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is
226. o freewheel stop 0 1 to 1600 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop Motor therm level 214 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay 0 to 1000 Hz 1 Load correction See page 9 Rated correction in Hz These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 62 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC With graphic display keypad 0A Term 0 00Hz 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 2 MONITORING MAIN MENU 1 3 SETTINGS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot freq 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick Code Quick With integrated display keypad Power up 63 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC The parameters in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions Auto tuning tUn page 65 which may cause the motor to start up Parameters containing the sign in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped 60Hz 60 bFr 1 Standard mot freq
227. o the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 61 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 11 Pulse warning thd 0 Hz to 30 00 kHz 0 Hz Speed threshold measured by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 225 assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 LJ Freq threshold 0 0 to 1600 Hz High speed HSP Frequency threshold for Freq Th att FtA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function page 192 1 Freq threshold 2 Frequency threshold for Freq Th 2 attain F2A function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 97 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function page 192 0 0 to 1600 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 to 1600 Hz High speed HSP 4 Freewheel stop Thd See page 134 This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt or Ramp stop rMP 0 0 Does not switch t
228. ogic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment 1 page 105 No nO 41 Drive lock No nO Function inactive L114 L11 No nO See the assignment conditions on page 118 The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to O 5 to 999 s 55 1 Mains V time out Monitoring time for closing of line contactor If once this time has elapsed there is no voltage on the drive power circuit the drive will lock with a Line contactor fault LCF 183 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Output contactor command This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor The request for the contactor to close is made when a run command is sent The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor CAUTION If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode as the contactor only opens at the end of braking Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Output contactor feedback The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation In the event of an inconsistency the drive trips on FCF2 fault if the output contactor fails to close LIx at 1 and an fault if it fails to open LIx at 0 The parameter Delay to motor r
229. ols running or stopping Example of source wiring 424 LM Lik LI1 forward NEN reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring MT Series 24 LH LI2 Lix LI1 stop Y tT LI2 forward E reverse A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control ECC press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The following function will be returned to factory settings 2 wire type tCt page 83 as will all functions which assign logic inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Macro configuration Start Stop StS Start Stop StS Start stop M handling Handling Hoisting HSt Hoisting Gen Use GEn General use PID regul Pid PID regulation Network C nEt Communication bus Mast slave MSL Master slave A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of Macro configuration CFG press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used
230. on card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Speed UPat Speed command HMI LCC Graphic display keypad Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted 120 1 06 COMMAND CtL LI Copy channel 1 lt gt 2 Can be used to copy the current reference and or the command by means of switching in order to avoid speed surges for example If Profile CHCF page 119 Not separ SIM or Separate SEP copying will only be possible from channel 1 to channel 2 If Profile CHCF profile IO copying will be possible in both directions No nO No copy Reference SP Copy reference Command Cd Copy command ref ALL Copy command and reference A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals The reference copied is FrH before ramp unless the destination channel reference is set via speed In this case the reference copied is rFr after ramp WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Copying the command and or reference can change the direction of rotation Check that
231. on loaded previously Load a compatible configuration Dynamic load fault Abnormal load variation Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle Removal of a run command causes a reset Cards pairing The CARDS PAIRING PPI function page 229 has been configured and a drive card has been changed In the event of a card error reinsert the original card Confirm the configuration by entering the Pairing password PPI if the card was changed intentionally Input phase loss Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse blown Failure of one phase 3 phase MT Series used on a single phase line supply Unbalanced load This protection only operates with the drive on load Check the power connection and the fuses Use a 3 phase line supply Disable the fault by Input phase loss IPL No nO page 215 Undervoltage Line supply too low Transient voltage dip Option card changed or removed When an option card is removed or replaced by another the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed or removed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes the factory settings to be restored see page 240 for the parameter groups affected by the card These are as follows Card replaced by a card of the same type cards Drive menu drM Encoder cards Drive menu drM Communication cards only t
232. ontrol Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control 1 DO1 delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true 1 active at Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments 121 DO1 holding time The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging 4 Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 POS 0 to 9999 ms 102 1 9 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 Configuration of analog outputs Minimum and maximum values output values The minimum output value in volts or mA cor
233. open NMT state Number of TX PDO 0 Number of RX 0 Error code 0 RX Error Counter 0 TX Error Counter 0 PDO images are only visible if CANopen has been enabled address other than OFF and if the PDOs are active PDO configuration using the network tool Some PDOs cannot be used RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PDO1 IMAGE Received PDO1 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO1 2 Received PDO1 3 Received PDO1 4 Transmit PDO1 1 Transmit PDO1 2 Transmit PDO1 3 Transmit PDO1 4 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PDO2 IMAGE Received PDO2 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO2 2 Received PDO2 3 Received PDO2 4 Transmit PDO2 1 Transmit PDO2 2 Transmit PDO2 3 Transmit PDO2 4 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PDO3 IMAGE Received PDO3 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO3 2 Received PDO3 3 Received PDO3 4 Transmit PDO3 1 Transmit PDO3 2 Transmit PDO3 3 Transmit PDO3 4 44 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using graphic display keypad Communication continued RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COMMUNICATION MAP Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230Hex W4325 F230 Hex WO0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP Input scanner and Output scanner Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input
234. operation is identical for both directions of operation Slowdown and stopping operate according to the same logic described below Example Forward slowdown on rising edge Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation The slowdown command is then memorized even in the event of a power outage Operation in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed The slowdown command is deleted on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation Abit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1 sensor changes continue to be monitored and saved 186 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Example Positioning on a limit switch on rising edge 7 Reverse Reverse Forward Forward stop slowdown slowdown stop Reverse Forward 4 Operation with short cams In this instance when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings the drive must initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown Forward stop zone Forward stop Operation with long cams In this i
235. orresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 38 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Factory setting Auto tuning O No nO Auto tuning not performed O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Caution Itis essential that all motor parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr are configured correctly before starting auto tuning If at least one of these parameters is modified after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return to No nO and must be repeated Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at O Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 228 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO
236. orresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate 51 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Parameter settings for K speed loop filter SFC Speed prop gain SPG and Speed time integral SIt The following parameters can only be accessed in vector control profiles Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVC V SVC I FVC FUC and Sync mot SYn and if ENA system EnA page 75 No nO The factory settings are suitable for most applications General case Setting for speed loop filter 0 The regulator is an IP type with filtering of the speed reference for applications requiring flexibility and stability hoisting or high inertia for example Speed prop gain SPG affects excessive speed Speed time integral SIt affects the bandwidth and response time Initial response Reduction in SIT w Reduction in SIT Reference division Reference division Reference division A 4 4 1 i 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms Initial response Increase in SPG Increase in SPG Reference division Reference division Reference division 4 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 50 100 150
237. parameters page 77 If the value is less than 2 kHz Current Limitation CLI and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 56 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with the drive stopped No restrictions Note In event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Note If Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC FUC we recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz in order to avoid speed instability CAUTION 401 to 405 drives if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage J Current Limitation 0 to 1 65 In 1 Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 56 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Dutput Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 214 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect i I Limi
238. perature alarm has been active seconds PID reference Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID feedback Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID error Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value PID Output Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured Config active CnFO 1 or 2 can be accessed if motor or configuration switching has been enabled see page 196 Utilised param set CFP1 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 192 48 1 5 SETTINGS SEt With graphic display keypad RDY 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU With integrated display keypad Power up RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code gt gt Quick Ramp increment 49 1 5 SETTINGS SEt The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting L OTOQOSOO LIWI i Ramp increment 0 01 0 1 1 0 1
239. pping a speed feedback fault difference between the estimated frequency and the measured speed Pulse thd wo Run No nO Activation and adjustment of brake failure monitoring Brake feedback brF If brake logic control Brake assignment DLC page 154 is not configured this parameter is forced to No nO No nO No brake monitoring 1 Hz to 1000 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping abrake failure fault detection of speeds other than zero T Pulse thd wo Run Time delay for taking brake failure fault into account 225 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Load variation detection This detection is only possible with the high speed hoisting function It can be used to detect if an obstacle has been reached triggering a sudden upward increase or downward decrease in the load Load variation detection triggers a Dynamic load fault fault dLF The Dyn load Mgt dLb parameter can be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this fault Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a logic output There are two possible detection modes depending on the configuration of high speed hoisting Speed reference mode High speed hoisting HSO page 165 Speed ref SSO Torque variation detection During high speed operation the load is compared to that measured during the speed step The permi
240. q level 59 has been assigned 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 165 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn PID regulator Block diagram The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback measurement Restart error Internal reference A Reference A Pages 113 and 114 PIF Encoder Network Al PID feedback rPI lis nO reference a Error threshold inversion wake up 1 YES Fu Gains Predictive speed Ramps reference ACC DEC 1 AC2 is only active when the PID function starts and during PID wake ups PID feedback Parameter Auto Manual eau The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment The PID feedback must be assigned to of the analog inputs to to the frequency input or the encoder according to whether any extension cards have been inserted PID reference The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters Preset references via logic inputs rP2 rP3 rP4 n accordance with the configuration of Act internal PII pages 170 Internal ref
241. qLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 62 46 1 2 MONITORING SUP Using integrated display keypad This menu can be used to display the drive inputs states and internal values Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI8 display segment assignment high 1 low 0 MERE CERE lll H State 0 Sg 2 251 m LI1 LI2 LIS 14 LI5 LI6 17 118 Example above LI1 and LI6 are at 1 LI2 to LI5 LI7 and LI8 are at 0 Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI9 to 1114 and PR Power Removal display segment assignment high 7 1 low 7 0 wb P d EA E be State 0 ond LI9 LI10 1111 1112 1113 LI14 PR Example above LI9 and 1114 are at 1 LI10 to LI13 are at 0 and PR Power Removal is at 1 Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible 47 1 2 MONITORI
242. r 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 O or 1 2 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1 3 values Note Do modify the parameters in 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu because any modifications made in this menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt will be lost on the next power up The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP menu on the active configuration Note Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display keypad Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display keypad if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display keypad by PowerSuite via the bus or communication network If the function has not been configured the MLP menu and the PS1 PS2 PS3 submenus will not appear 191 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 parameter sets O No nO Function inactive Freq Th att FtA Switching Freq threshold Ftd page 62 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 62 L114
243. r can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Rated linear speed in meters second 50 to 200 100 LJ Stop corrector The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate for example a non linear ramp 190 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu on page 49 can be selected and 2 or 3 different values assigned These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits This switching can be performed during operation motor running It can also be controlled on the basis of one or two frequency thresholds whereby each threshold acts as a logic input 0 threshold not reached 1 threshold reached Values 1 Values 2 Values 3 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Paramete
244. r provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive has been configured for closed loop operation and is only possible in this case L1 Speed ref PGr The encoder provides a reference Number of pulses 100 to 5000 Number of pulses per encoder revolution The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted Encoder EnC Reference type The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr Encoder EnC Use of an encoder Freq Use of a frequency generator unsigned reference 300 to 300 kHz 1 Freq min value The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed gJ Freq max value 0 00 to 300 kHz 300 kHz The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed 0 to 1000 ms Freq signal filter The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr Interference filtering 96 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ly R1 Assignment No drive fit FLt No nO Not assigned No drive flt FLt Dr
245. r when stopped 214 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt According to drive rating J Input phase loss Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied a single phase supply or by the DC bus Freewheel YES Fault with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss IPL but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault Factory setting Ignore nO for MT2P5 to MT203 Freewheel YES for all others Overtemp fault mgt Behavior in the event of the drive overheating Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the
246. rake linings Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using Pulse warning thd FqL page 62 and is assignable to a relay or logic output see page 97 224 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Frequency meter Activation of the speed measurement function L1 No nO Function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed Yes YES Function active assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the Pulse input input 1 0 to 100 0 1 0 Pulse scal divisor Scaling factor for the Pulse input input divisor The frequency measured is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 46 or 48 _ Overspd pulse nO Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring Overspeed fault No nO No overspeed monitoring O 1 Hz to 30 00 Hz Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the Pulse input input divided by Pulse scal divisor FqC Pulse overspd delay ROS DM ius Time delay for taking overspeed fault into account Level fr pulse ctrl Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the input Pulse input speed feedback Speed fdback loss SPF fault No nO No monitoring of speed feedback 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tri
247. rent Limitation CLI and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 56 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with the drive stopped No restrictions Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Note If Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC FUC we do not recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz in order to avoid speed instability CAUTION On MT401 to 405 drives if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage i Current Limitation 1 0 to 1 65 In 2 1 5 In 2 Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 214 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In cor
248. req bFr Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate MT Serieseee 100 to 240 V MT Serieseee 200 to 480 V 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr 1 Rated mot current Rated motor current given on the nameplate Rated motor freq 10 to 600 Hz 60 Hz Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 50 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 50 Hz g Rated motor speed 0 to 60000 RPM to drive Rated motor speed given on the nameplate 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows 100 slip as a 96 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in Hz 60 Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors J Max frequency 10 to 1600 Hz 72 Hz The factory setting is 72 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 50 Hz The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq FrS It must not exceed 500 Hz if the drive rating is higher than MT2P5037M3 values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible for powers limited to 37 KW 50 HP 1 In c
249. responds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds to its upper limit The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Parameter assigned Parameter assigned n A Upper limit Upper limit Current or Lower Current or imit voltage imi Min Output Max Output 20 mA limit Output Min Output 20 mA 2 AOLx or AOHx or or AOHx or AOLx or or MPH UOLx UOHx 10V UOHx UOLx 10V Outputs AO2 and AO3 configured as bipolar outputs strongly recommended for signed parameters The min Output UOLx and max Output UOHXx parameters are absolute values although they function symmetrically In the case of bipolar outputs always set the maximum value higher than the minimum value The max Output UOHXx corresponds to the upper limit of the assigned parameter and the min Output UOLx corresponds to an average value between the upper and lower limits 0 for a signed and symmetrical parameter such as in the example below Parameter assigned 4 Upper limit Voltage Min Output Max Output 10V output UOLx UOHx esas L Lower limit 103 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Scaling of the assigned parameter The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits by means of two parameters for each analog o
250. responds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 76 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Noise reduction According to rating O No nO Fixed frequency Factory setting at and above 55 kW 75 HP and at and above 90 kW 125 HP O Yes YES Frequency with random modulation Factory setting up to 45 kW 60 HP and up to 75 kW 100 HP Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency i Motor surge limit No nO This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications NEMA motors Japanese motors Spindle motors Rewound motors No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Function active This parameter is forced to No nO if Sinus filter previous page Yes YES This parameter can remain No nO for 230 400 V motors used at 230 V or if the length of cable between the drive and the motor does not exceed 4m with unshielded cables 10 m with shielded cables LI Volt surge limit opt Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals Can be accessed if Motor surge limit SUL 7 Yes YES Set to 6 8 10 us according to the following table The value of the SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of
251. ro the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction see pages 148 and 186 reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus when the power supply is connected the drive will display Freewheel nSt and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command Fault which cannot be reset automatically The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by turning the drive off and then back on AnF brF EnF SOF SPF and tnF faults can also be reset remotely by means a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 210 EnF InFb SOF SPF and tnF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 221 AI2 input Probable cause U s I UH YY Non conforming signal on analog input AI2 Check the wiring of analog input AI2 and the value of the signal Load slipping The encoder speed feedback does not match the reference Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add a braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the encoder s mechanical coupling and its wiring DBR overload The braking resistor is under excessive stress Check the size of the resistor and wait for it to cool down Check the DB Resistor Power brP and DB Resistor value brU parameters page 228
252. rt has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again The faults which permit this function are listed on page 260 LJ restart time 5 minutes 5 5 min 5 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 10 minutes 30 minutes 30 30 minutes 1 hour 1h 1 hour 2 hours 2h 2 hours 3 hours 3h 3 hours Unlimited Ct Unlimited This parameter appears if Automatic restart Atr Yes YES It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault 211 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 212 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Motor thermal protection Function Thermal protection by calculating the 124 Note The memory of the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is switched off The power off time is used to recalculate the thermal state the next time the drive is switched on Naturally cooled motors The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency Force cooled motors Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered regardless of the motor frequency Trip time in seconds 1
253. rting Important n factory settings mode the motor can only be supplied with power once the forward reverse and DC injection stop commands have been reset On power up or a manual fault reset or after a stop command If they have not been reset the drive will display nSt but will not start f automatic restart function has been configured Automatic restart Atr parameter the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu see page 214 these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary Test on a low power motor or without a motor factory settings mode Output Phase Loss detection OPL page 214 is active YES To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive particularly useful in the case of high power drives deactivate Output Phase Loss OPL no Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 66 CAUTION Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0 2 times the rated drive current Provide an alternative means of thermal protection Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Using motors in parallel Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 66 CAUTION
254. ry setting Counter wobble O No nO Function not assigned L14 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 Synchronization input To be configured on the winding drive slave only Sync wobble L1 No nO Function not assigned LO1 101 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted 901 401 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment AO1 page 105 No nO Synchronization output To be configured on the yarn guide drive master only 0 to 1600 Hz 1 Decrease ref speed Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle LI traverse ctrl L1 No nO Function not assigned L114 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1 the traverse control operating time is reset to zero along with Decrease ref speed dtF 203 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Evacuation function The evacuation function is designed for elevator applications It is only accessible for MT4 380 480 V drives up to 75 kW 100 HP only When an elevator is stuck between 2 floors due to a power outage it mu
255. s and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage No nO Function inactive LI1 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at O fault monitoring is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 fault monitoring is inactive Active faults are reset on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit Note The Power Removal function and any faults that prevent any form of operation are not affected by this function A list of faults affected by this function appears on pages 257 to 262 221 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN I FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 4 Network fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with a communication card Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page
256. s and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 124 Modbus fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated Modbus Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 83 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop
257. s the menu itself The custom display settings 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu 244 4 PASSWORD Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Status Unlocked ULC Information parameter cannot be modified O Locked LC The drive is locked by a password O Unlocked ULC The drive is not locked by a password LJ PIN code 1 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF 19 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value ON On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 LJ PIN code 2 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF Parameter can only be accessed in Expert mode 219 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value ON On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Motortronics Product Support LI Upload rights Read or copy the current configuration to the drive Permitted ULr0 The current drive configuration can always be uplo
258. same time lt The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other Stop functions have priority over run commands Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references Note This compatibility table does not affect commands that be assigned to the keys of the graphic display keypad see page 122 125 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Incompatible functions The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below Automatic restart This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 83 Catch a spinning load This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 83 This function is locked if automatic injection on stop Auto DC injection AdC Continuous Ct See page 136 The SUP monitoring menu page 41 can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility When a function is assigned appears on the graphic display as illustrated in the example below Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT REFERENCE SWITCH REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been as
259. sents the factory setting assignment Instructions Fr1 SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 MA2 MA3 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr1b for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr1b for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 terminals Fr2 Terminals graphic display keypad integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card and speed Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu 112 1 06 COMMAND CtL Reference channel for Not separ SIM Separate SEP and profile IO configurations PID configured with PID references at the terminals Ref 1B switching Fc uc Ref 1 channel ov Note Forced local is not E 15H Al2 active in profile Ref 1B channel lt PID B pp Summing ref 2 166 gt cce Summing ref 3 S 3 2 Subiract rer Graphic display Su 2 M keypad 1 E lt Subtract ref 3 5 LL High speed Ramps 1 Channel 1 38 Ref 2 channel i E Eez Channel 2 speed FLU Key Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter The black square represents t
260. setting Yarn control No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters LH i1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 The traverse control cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0 Traverse freq high 1 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz Traverse Freq Low N w 0 to Traverse freq Quick step High high trH 0 to Traverse Freq Quick step Low Low trL Traverse ctrl accel Traverse ctrl decel Reel time 0 to 9999 minutes 0 minute Reel execution time End reel No nO Function not assigned LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 be selected R2 2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted 901 401 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment 1 105 No nO The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the Reel time tbO 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 202 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Facto
261. signed an alarm message will appear With the graphic display terminal icum 0 00Hz ATIBILITY The function can t be assigned because an incompatible function is already selected See programming book ENT or ESC to continue With the integrated display COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed When you assign a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit to a function pressing the HELP button will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input bit or channel 126 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn When a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned to another function the following screens appear Using the graphic display keypad RUN 50 00Hz 1250 50 00Hz WARNING ASSIGNED TO Ref 2 switching ENT gt Continue ESC gt Cancel If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT results in the following display RUN 50 00Hz 1250A 50 00Hz ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN Un assign the present functions or select Advanced access level Using the integrated display keypad The code for the first function which is already assigned is displayed flashing If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assi
262. spect repair the drive Internal mftg zone Internal data inconsistent Recalibrate the drive performed by Motortronics Product Support Internal fault option The option installed in the drive is not recognized Check the reference and compatibility of the option Internal hard init Initialization of the drive is incomplete Turn off and reset Internal ctrl supply The control power supply is incorrect Check the control section power supply Internal measure The current measurements are incorrect Replace the current sensors or the power card Inspect repair the drive Internal mains circuit The input stage is not operating correctly Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Internal th sensor The drive temperature sensor is not operating correctly The braking unit s temperature sensor is not operating correctly Replace the drive temperature sensor Inspect repair the drive Replace the braking unit s temperature sensor Inspect repair the braking unit The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt DUb parameter page 228 if there is no braking unit connected to the drive Internal time meas Fault on the electronic time measurement component Inspect repair the drive internal CPU Internal microprocessor fault Turn off and reset Inspect repair the dri
263. ssible load variation and its duration can be configured If exceeded the drive switches to fault mode Current limitation mode High speed hoisting HSO page 165 Current Limit CSO On ascend during high speed operation an increase in load will result in a drop in speed Even if high speed operation has been activated if the motor frequency drops below the Limit Frequency SCL threshold page 165 the drive will switch to fault mode On descend operation takes the form of speed reference mode 226 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A Dynamic load time Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation fault Dynamic load fault 4 into account L1 No nO No load variation detection 0 00 s to 10 00 Adjustment of the time delay for taking fault into account Dynamic load time 100 Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection as a of rated motor torque load Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 134 without tripping fault In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as t
264. st be possible to evacuate its occupants within a reasonable period of time This function requires an emergency power supply to be connected to the drive This power supply is at a reduced voltage and only allows a derated operating mode at reduced speed but with full torque The function requires One logic input to control evacuation operation Reduction of the voltage monitoring threshold An appropriate low speed reference Following a power outage and turning off of the drive the latter can be powered up again without going into Undervoltage USF fault mode if the corresponding control bit or logic input is at 1 at the same time It is then possible to control ascent FW or descent RV CAUTION This input must not be at 1 when the drive is powered from the line supply To ensure this and also avoid any short circuits supply changeover contactors must be used Set this input to 0 before connecting the emergency power supply to the line supply Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Evacuation assign No nO Function not assigned O LI 1 L11 to LI6 Li6 LI7 Li7 to LI10 L110 If MT VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If MT VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at 1 if the drive is stationary
265. t 2 value 0 to 1 65 In 1 See page 181 The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 56 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Dutput Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 214 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 56 1 5 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range FLU 1 Motor fluxing FnO Fal O Not cont FnC Non continuous mode Continuous Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection AdC page 136 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 134 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVCI or FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt page 66 SVCI FVC FUC or Sync mot SYn the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup
266. t level 2 1 3 2 77 Injection current activated by logic input selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 OG ue Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only Can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection dCl 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 3 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 230 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM With graphic display keypad RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display keypad
267. t any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Torque Torque limitation Torque reference AB and CD Fallback to speed regulation BC Torque control zone E Ideal operating point reference The torque sign and value can be transmitted via a logic output and an analog output 175 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Trq spd switching L1 No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters Yes YES Permanent torque control L11 See the assignment conditions page 118 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 Torque control If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Speed regulation LI Torque ref channel nO Not assigned zero torque reference Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted 100 of the reference corresponds to 300 of the
268. t switch management 148 Line contactor command 182 Load measurement 159 Load sharing 79 Load variation detection 226 Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS COMFIG 194 Motor thermal protection 213 Noise reduction TIT Output contactor command 184 Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING 191 PASSWORD 244 regulator 166 Positioning by sensors or limit switches 186 Preset speeds 139 PTC probes 208 RAMP AAT REFERENCE SWITCH 129 Rope slack 164 RP CONFIGURATION 93 Save reference 146 STOP CONFIGURATION 134 Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 188 Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier 128 Synchronous motor Torque limitation 178 Torque regulation 175 Traverse control 197 Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 224 265 index of parameter codes Page 2 t 5 33 ISONILLAS AXOL V4 102 NOILVOINNINWOD 6 4 e N e 774 LNANS9VNVW LINVS 8 L LoNnd 133 145 133 91 1 549 SLNdLNO S1ndNI D D D 90 E ug 1041NOO t1 335 S NILL3S 1 dI15 DNINOLINOW 220 UI 5 LYVLS
269. t the operations from 5 onwards until Encoder check EnC changes to Done dOnE 10 necessary change Motor control type Ctt to FVC FUC Encoder check Not done nO Check encoder feedback See the procedure below The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 Not done nO Check not performed Yes YES Activates monitoring of the encoder Done dOnE Check performed successfully The check procedure checks The direction of rotation of the encoder motor The presence of signals wiring continuity The number of pulses revolution If a fault is detected the drive locks in Encoder fault EnF fault mode No nO Encoder usage The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 L1 nO Function inactive Fdbk SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only O Spd fdk reg The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed loop operation Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt SVC V UUC the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed This configuration is not accessible for other Motor control type Ctt values Speed ref PGr The encoder provides a reference 1 The encoder parameters can only be
270. tains 4 selection options HOME Return to MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RETURN TO MAIN MENU DIRECT ACCESS TO 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS GOTO MULTIPOINT SCREEN ENT p gt 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS DIRECT ACCESS Opens the direct access window which See page 255 will contain the text 1 The function keys lt lt and gt gt F2 and can be used to select each of the numbers and the navigation button to increment or decrement the numbers 1 3 in the example below 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A DIRECT ACCESS TO 1 3 SETTINGS ENT Ramp increment 01 1 3 Acceleration Deceleration SETTINGS Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Opens a window in which the last 10 parameters modified can be accessed directly RDY 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Rated mot current Acceleration 10s Ww J ENA prop gain 1 2 Rated mot current 15A 15 0 A Preset speed 4 20Hz 21 Graphic display keypad MAIN MENU Menu mapping RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNC
271. te 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 83 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent Ramp divider 1 0 to 10 4 The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt and if Fast stop assign FSt is not No nO The ramp that is enabled dEC or dE2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 134 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A DC injection assign No nO Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 124 L1 No nO Not assigned LH L1 See the assignment conditions on page 118 DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 83 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent g DC inject level 1 1 3 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 Level of DC injec
272. ted motor frequency FrS Torque 0 max Tr Rated Torque motor torque Rated motor frequency FrS High speed HSP 161 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn There are 2 possible operating modes Speed reference mode The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step that is set so that the drive can measure the load Current limitation mode The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in motor mode in the Ascending direction only For the Descending direction operation is always in Speed reference mode Speed reference mode Ascend or Descend command Reference FrS OSP 0 Frequency HSP Calculated limit 4 FrS OSP OSP Adjustable speed step for load measurement tOS Load measuring time Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive for ascending and descending 162 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Current limiting mode Limit imposed by current limitation Eee gt t 1 g g E o c 0 o o g x c o lt S EN Current 4 CLO SCL Adjustable speed threshold above which current limitation is active CLO Current limitation for high speed function 163 1 APPLICATION FUNC I J FUn Rop
273. ted Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO channel 2 Modbus Mdb Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Not applicable The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO r FC LJ Ref 2 switching ch1 active Fr1 1 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1 channel Fr1 active Frg ch2 active Fr2 no switching Ref 2 channel Fr2 active LI1 L11 See the assignment conditions page 118 not CDOO to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active If the assigned bit or input is at 1 channel Ref 2 channel Fr2 is active LI Ref 2 channel No nO No nO Not assigned If Profile CHCF Not separ SIM the command is at the terminals with a zero reference If Profile CHCF Separate SEP or profile IO the reference is zero AH Analog input 21 12 Analog input AI3 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extensi
274. ters max 18 251 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 7 2 USER MENU PARAMETER SELECTION SELECTED LIST PARAMETER SELECTION 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ENT PARAMETER SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS List RDY 0 00Hz 0A SELECTED LIST Ramp increment Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Acceleration Speed prop gain Delete Up Use the F2 and F3 keys to arrange the parameters in the list example below using F3 RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A SELECTED LIST Acceleration Ramp increment Speed prop gain Delete Up Selection of parameters included in the user menu Note The 15 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List Parameter list making up the user menu 252 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS PROTECTION VISIBILITY ENT Code lt lt gt gt Quick T Selection to display all PARAMETERS parameters or only the active parameters Press ESC to exit this screen Term 0 00Hz 0A VISIBILITY PARAMETERS MENUS ENT ENT MENUS You remain exclusively in the 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU menu All 1 1 SIMPLY START 4 menus selected by default 1 2 MONITORING
275. ting Q speed assignment 7 No nO No nO function inactive i 2 2 3 5 1 Name of menu on 4 digit 7 segment display 5 Name of menu on graphic display keypad 2 Submenu code on 4 digit 7 segment display 6 Name of submenu on graphic display keypad 3 Parameter code on 4 digit 7 segment display 7 Name of parameter on graphic display keypad 4 Parameter value on 4 digit 7 segment display 8 Value of parameter on graphic display keypad Note The text in square brackets indicates what you will see on the graphic display keypad The factory settings correspond to Macro configuration Start Stop StS This is the macro configuration set at the factory 30 interdependence of parameter values The configuration of certain parameters modifies the adjustment range of other parameters in order to reduce the risk of errors This may result in the modification of a factory setting or a value you have already selected Example 1 Current Limitation CLI page 56 set to 1 6 In or left at its factory setting 1 5 In 2 Switching freq SFr page 56 set to 1 kHz and confirmed with ENT restricts Current Limitation CLI to 1 36 In 3 If Switching freq SFr is increased to 4 kHz Current limitation CLI is no longer restricted but remains at 1 36 In If you require 1 6 In you must reset Current Limitation CLI 31 Find
276. tion Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Shielded BELDEN cable Shielded PROTOFLEX cable Type 2950x Type EMV 2YSLCY J kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 50 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 MT401 0 75 1 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT402 1 5 2 15 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT403 2 2 3 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd 405 4 5 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74 32 81 yd 407 5 5 7 5 2 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74 32 81 yd 410 7 5 10 2 5 14 54 68 4 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT415 11 15 6 10 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT420 15 20 10 8 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT425 18 5 25 10 8 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd MT430 22 30 16 6 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 MT440 30 40 25 4 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 MT450 37 50 35 5 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 MT460 45 60 50 0 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 yd MT475 55 75 70 2 0 82 02 yd 32 81 yd 16 40 yd MT4100 75 100 95 4 0 82 02 yd 32 81 yd 16 40 yd For 230 400 V motors used at 230 V the Motor surge limit SUL parameter can remain No nO 78 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting According to drive Q r Braking level E DC bus voltage threshold above which the braking transistor cuts in to limit this voltage MT2 factory setting 395 V factory setting 785 V The adjustment range depends on the voltage rating of the drive and the Mains voltage UrES parameter page 218 _ Braking balance No nO No nO Function inactive
277. tion braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection dCI or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 1 3 cats 22 Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 The parameter be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection 4 or if DC injection assign is not No nO DC inject level 2 1 3 0 1 In 2 to DC inject 0 5 In 2 level 1 IdC Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed The parameter be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection 4 or if DC injection assign is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 1 3 Bites ps Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only The parameter can be accessed if Stop type Stt DC injection 4 1
278. tion can be accessed if brake logic control is assigned see page 154 If Weight sensor ass PES is not No nO Movement type bSt page 154 is forced to Hoisting UEr nO Function inactive Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 A13 Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Analog input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP Frequency input if MT VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via AI net channel AIC1 page 92 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 234 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Point 1 X 0 to 99 99 0 to 99 99 of signal on assigned input Point 1x LP1 must be less than Point 2x LP2 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned LI Point 1Y 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 1 X LP1 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned g Point 2X 0 01 to
279. tion can still be modified in the other menus 33 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Assignment of the inputs outputs 1 To start with integrated Modbus Modbus Address Add must first be configured page 233 Note These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes Input Start Stop M handling Gen Use Hoisting PID regul Network Mast output slave Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 2 channel Ref 1 channel reference Ref 1 channel integrated Modbus 1 Al2 No Summing ref 2 Summing ref 2 No PID feedback No Torque reference AO1 No No No No No No No R1 No drive flt drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt R2 No No No Brk control No No No 2 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI2 2 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI3 2 wire No 2 preset speeds Fault reset PID integral 2 Trq spd reset switching switching LI4 2 wire No 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset PID Fault reset Fault reset ref LI5 2 wire No 8 preset speeds Torqu
280. tion time The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 66 FVC or Sync mot SYn this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 0 2 d level of standstill DC injection current The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 66 Sync mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 136 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 Auto DC inj time 2 0 to 30s 2 d standstill injection time The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC Yes YES Operation Note When Motor control type Ctt page 66_ FVC FUC Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 t tdC2 cannot be accessed only Auto DC inj time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time
281. top etc and references can be sent using the following channels Control Reference Terminals logic inputs LI Terminals analog inputs Al frequency input encoder Graphic display keypad Graphic display keypad Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Integrated CANopen Communication card Communication card speed via the terminals e speed via the graphic display terminal The behavior of the MT Series can be adapted according to requirements Not separ SIM Command and reference are sent via the same channel Separate SEP Command and reference may be sent via different channels In these configurations control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely assignable bits see Communication Parameters Manual The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface profile IO The command and the reference can come from different channels This configuration both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus When commands are sent via a bus they are available on a word which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word More than one function can be assigned to the same bit Note Stop commands from the ter
282. tor closes every time a run command forward or reverse is sent and opens after every stop as soon as the drive is at zero speed For example if the stop mode is stop on ramp the contactor will open when the motor reaches zero speed Note The drive control power supply must be provided an external 24 V source Example circuit Note The Run Reset button must be pressed once the Emergency stop button has been released stop 4 7 3 Run Reset line K11 Lle Run command Forward or Reverse LO Re Line contactor ass LLC Lin Drive lock LES CAUTION This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 182 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Line contactor ass Logic output or control relay O No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LO1 L01 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 401 Analog output 1 functioning as a l
283. tr1 and Config 2 Str2 appear The parameter changes back to No nO as soon as the operation is complete List of motor parameters 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS UO UO to U5 05 F1 F1 to F5 F5 constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode page 70 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Mot therm current ItH Example of total return to factory settings 1 Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl 2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST FrY All ALL 3 Goto FACTORY SETTINGS GFS YES 240 1 15 USER MENU Uor This menu contains the parameters selected in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu on page 250 Using graphic display keypad Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 11 IDENTIFICATION
284. trol 2pt UC2 Yes YES According to drive Standard mot freq Freq Const Power rating and Rated bFr motor freq FrS The parameter can be accessed if Vector Control 2pt UC2 7 Yes YES 68 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Synchronous motor parameters These parameters can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 66 cannot be accessed Name Description a Nominal sync Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate 1 Nom motor spdsync Rated motor speed given on the nameplate Adjustment range 0 25 to 1 5 In 2 Factory setting According to drive rating Sync mot SYn In this case the Induction motor parameters 0 to 60000 rpm According to drive rating On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm Pole pairs Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor Syn EMF constant 1 to 50 According to drive rating 0 to 65535 According to drive rating Synchronous motor EMF constant in mV per rpm peak voltage per phase On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 Autotune L d axis Axis d stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis 19 J Autotune L q axis Axis q stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis 19 Cust stator R syn 5
285. trol cards the MT VW3A3202 extension card and the communication cards The serial number for the two control cards Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting N Pairing password OFF to 9999 OFF OFF The OFF OFF value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive The ON On value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in the event of a card pairing fault As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to ON On The PPI code is an unlock code contact factory 229 1 9 FAULT MANAGEMEN FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting i Fallback speed 0 to 1600 Hz Selection of the fallback speed Ramp divider 1 The ramp that is enabled dEC is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time g DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 a Urt Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 DC injec
286. true R3 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R3 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control bLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false R4 Assignment Identical to R2 see page 98 R4 Delay time The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R4 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R4 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt
287. ts outputs the drive internal states and values and the communication data and values RUN Term 50 00 2 80 VO MAP P PROG CARD MAP I O of the Controller Inside card if it is present COMMUNICATION MAP Communication data and values Alarm groups Frequency ref p gt Drive internal drive states and values see page 46 RUN Term 50 0042 80 Move from one screen to another LOGICINPUT mE from LOGIC INPUT MAP BNALOGINPUTS IMAGE to FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE LOGIC OUTPUT MAP by turning the navigation button ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE State 0 50 004 gt 80 Access to the selected input or REN Tem ER 90 LOGIC INPUT MAP output configuration LI1 assignment m State 1 R LM LI2 LI4 LIB LI6 117 Press ENT orward 0 m a Pre Fluxing 18 LI9 L110 LI11 LI12 L113 L114 LI1 On Delay ou E E m B RUN Term 50 00 2 80 RUN Term 50 00 2 80 assignment i 9 87 V Ref 1 channel 2 2 35 mA Forced local Torque reference min value max value LOGIC OUTPUT MAP ENT LO1 assignment State 0 R1 R2 10 No Q 64 LO1 delay time 4 State 1 LO1 active at 0000000000000010b LO1 holding time RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 Term 50 00Hz 80 ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE ENT AO1 assignment 9 87 V Motor freq AO1 min output AO1 max output AO1
288. tting changes to High torq A dYnA with certain ratings if Sinus filter page 76 Yes YES The function is incompatible with applications requiring Positioning on a ramp The use of a braking resistor the resistor would not operate correctly 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 131 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 133 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting g Type of stop Ramp stop rMP Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop Freewheel stop nSt Freewheel stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop Note If the brake logic function on page 154 has been enabled or if Low speed time out tLS page 57 or 173 is not 0 only ramp type stops may be configured N Freewheel stop Thd 1 0 0 to 1600 Hz 0 0 Hz This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt or Ramp stop rMP 0 0 Does not switch to freewheel stop 0 1 to 1600 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop No nO
289. ubtract ref 3 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 Ref 1B channel Frib Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Multiplier ref 2 No nO Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Multiplier ref 3 No nO Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above 130 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description J Ramp type Linear Lin S ramp S U ramp U Customized CUS S ramps f Hz Customized ramps f Hz FrS f Hz Adjustment range Factory setting Linear The rounding coefficient is fixed where t2 0 6 x t1 and t1 set ramp time The rounding coefficient is fixed where t2 0 5 x t1 and t1 set ramp time tA1 adjustable from 0 to 10096 tA2 adjustable from 0 to 10096 tA1 tA3 adjustable from 0 to 10096 tA4 adjustable from 0 to 10096 1 Asa 96 of t1 where t1 7 set ramp time Ramp increment 1 0 1 0 1 0 01 Ramp up to 99 99 seconds L1 0 1 Ramp up to 999 9 seconds 1 Ramp up to 6000 seconds This parameter is
290. ultiplication 128 E S ramps 131 Jog operation 138 m Preset speeds 439 speed speed using single action pushbuttons 142 1 step speed speed using double action pushbuttons 142 2 steps speed around a reference 144 B Save reference 146 Application functions Application specific functions Applications Functions Page Fast stop 134 Limit switch management 148 E Brake control 150 l Load measurement 459 High speed hoisting 161 5 164 regulator 166 Torque monitoring 175 m El Motor generator torque limit 178 m m Load sharing m m Line contactor control 162 m m Output contactor control 184 Positioning by limit switches or sensors 186 m El Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 188 m ENA system mechanical with unbalanced load 74 Parameter switching 191 m m Motor or configuration switching 194 Traverse control 197 m Stop configuration 134 m B Evacuation 204 Half floor 205 10 Application functions Safety functions fault management Applications Functions Page Power Removal safety function see User s Manual B Bl a Deferred stop on thermal alarm 216 B Alarm handling 109 gl gl Fault manag
291. umi sawmasmasas 6 Sf FACTORY SETTINGS J 4521 uuu 9 Er ROSE 2 2 PASSWORD eo page 33 Simplified menu for fast startup page 41 Visualization of current motor and input output values page 49 Adjustment parameters can be modified during operation page 65 Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc page 82 I O configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc page 110 Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc page 123 Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc page 207 Configuration of fault management page 231 Communication parameters fieldbus page 238 Access to configuration files and return to factory settings page 241 Specific menu set up by the user using the graphic display keypad page 245 Not used page 244 page 27 A dash appears after menu and submenu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes Examples FUn menu ACC parameter a The grayed out menus may not be accessible depending on the control access LAC configuration 25 Integrated display keypad Accessing menu parameters Save and store the displayed selection Menu Parameter Value or assignment
292. un dbS can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command is sent and the Delay to open cont dAS parameter delays the fault when a stop command is set Note Fault FCF2 contactor failing to close can be reset by the run command changing state from 1 to 0 0 gt 1 gt 0 in 3 wire control The Out contactor ass OCC and Output contact fdbk rCA functions can be used individually or together 184 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Out contactor ass Logic output or control relay L1 No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted 901 401 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 105 No nO i Output contact No nO No nO Function inactive LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 118 The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 0 05 to 60 5 i Delay to motor Time delay for Motor control following the sending of a run command Output contactor fault monitoring if the feedback is
293. utotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS If one or more of these parameters is modified after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return to No nO and the procedure must be repeated Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 228 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Note During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current RUE J Automatic autotune top ne n nO Function inactive 5 Yes YES Auto tuning is performed every power up Caution Same comments as for Auto tuning above Auto tuning state Not done For information only cannot be modified Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor Pending PEnd Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress Failed FA
294. utput These parameters are given in 96 10096 corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter so 100 upper limit lower limit For example Sign torque Stq which varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque 10096 corresponds to 6 times the rated torque The parameter Scaling AOx min ASLx modifies the lower limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 0 factory setting does not modify the lower limit The parameter Scaling AOx max ASHx modifies the upper limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 100 factory setting does not modify the upper limit Scaling AOx min ASLx must always be lower than Scaling AOx max Upper limit of the assigned parameter 100 96 New scale ASHx ASLx Lower limit of the assigned parameter Application example 1 The value of the assigned motor torque at the 2 output is to be transferred with 10 V with a range of 2 Tr to 2 Tr The parameter Sign torque Stq varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque or a range of 6 times the rated torque Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must modify the lower limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 6 16 796 new value lower limit range x ASL2 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 100 6 83 3 new value lower limit range x ASH2 Application example 2 The value of the motor current at the AO2
295. valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration dEC Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 1 Acceleration 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 3 05 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 64 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 1 Deceleration 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 3 05 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 64 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 131 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Begin Acc round 0 to 100 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 1 End Acc round 1 10 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round tA1 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 1 0 to 100 10 Begin Dec round
296. ve Overcurrent Parameters in the SETTINGS SEt and 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menus are not correct Inertia or load too high Mechanical locking Check the parameters Check the size of the motor drive load Check the state of the mechanism Power removal Fault with the drive s Power removal safety function Inspect repair the drive Motor short circuit Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Impedant sh circuit Ground short circuit Significant ground leakage current at the drive output if several motors are connected in parallel Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Reduce the switching frequency Connect chokes in series with the motor Overspeed Instability or driving load too high Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the parameters settings for the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 225 if it is configured Faults Causes Remedies Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Probable cause Speed fdback loss Encoder feedback signal missing Check the wiring between the encoder and the drive Check the encoder Signal on Pulse input missing if the Check the wiring of the input cable and the detector used input is used for speed
297. ve returns to its base reference following the ramp determined by the traverse control function The function then stops as soon as it has returned to this reference Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active 197 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Function parameters These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference as shown in the diagram below Motor speed tdn tUP Frequency jump 4 trH Base reference trL 1 Frequency jump 0 e Yarn control Assignment of the traverse control command to logic input or to a communication bus control word bit tdn Traverse ctrl decel time in seconds tUP Traverse ctrl accel time in seconds trH Traverse freq high in Hertz Traverse Freq Low in Hertz qSH Quick step High in Hertz qSL Quick step Low in Hertz Reel parameters tbO Reel time Time taken to make a reel in minutes This parameter is intended to signal the end of winding When the traverse control operating time since command trC reaches the value of tbO the logic output or one of the relays changes to state 1 if the corresponding function EbO has been assigned The traverse control operating time EbOt can be monitored online by a communication bus and in the Monitoring menu Decrease ref speed Decrease in the base reference In certain cases the base reference has to be reduced as the ree
298. ve switches to zero speed regulation with no brake release command and a bSA alarm is triggered I Current ramp time 0 to 5 00 s 0s Torque current ramp time increase and decrease for a current variation equal to Brake release FW lbr Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Load measurement This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current Brake release FW Ibr of the BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL bLC function The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input usually a 4 20 mA signal to the pulse in input or to the encoder input according to the type of weight sensor Examples Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load Measurement of the total weight of an elevator winch the cabin and counterweight The current Brake release FW Ibr is adapted in accordance with the curve below e Ibr 1 a 1 1 1 1 l l 1 1 1 1 1 1 Point 2y 2 Point 1x LP1 Weight sensor signal Point 2x 100 LP2 Zero load Point 1y CP1 This curve can represent a weight sensor on an elevator winch where zero load on the motor occurs when the load in the elevator is not zero 159 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn Weight sensor ass eh nen Func
299. wer than the reference If slip setting gt actual slip The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 69 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL arC Motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode These include Parameters calculated by the drive during auto tuning in read only mode For example Rir calculated cold stator resistance The possibility of replacing some of these calculated parameters by other values if necessary For example R1w measured cold stator resistance When a parameter Xyw is modified by the user the drive uses it in place of the calculated parameter Xyr Ac Inductance motor an auto tuning operation is performed or if one of the motor parameters on which auto tuning depends is modified Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr parameters Xyw return to their factory settings Name Description Stator R measured Cold stator resistance calculated by the drive in read only mode Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 100 above 75 kW 100 HP Idr Magnetizing current in A calculated by
300. xample 11 V on a Reference 100 10 0V input If the input range is configured as bidirectional operation remains identical to Standard bSd This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account for analog inputs and Pulse input only In the case of the PID regulator this is the PID output reference The limits are set by the Low speed LSP and High speed HSP parameters page 40 86 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Delinearization For analog inputs only The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input output curve of this input For range 0 gt 10096 Reference n u Interm point Y 4 0 Min value Interm point Max value 096 X 100 20 mA or 10 V Current or voltage input Note For Interm point X 0 corresponds to Min value and 100 to Max value For range 100 gt 100 Current or voltage input Reference 4 100 Interm point Y rim cm Min value Interm 100 point X 096 0 1 1 Interm point Y 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 Interm point Max value 100 20 or 10V 87 1 9 INPUTS OUIPUI S CFG 1 Name D
301. y the number of speeds configured 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 141 1 APPLICATION FUNC I FUn speed Two types of operation are available 1 Use of single action buttons Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction s The input assigned to the speed command increases the speed the input assigned to the speed command decreases the speed 2 Use of double action buttons Only one logic input assigned to speed is required speed with double press buttons Description 1 button pressed twice 2 steps for each direction of rotation A contact closes each time the button is pressed Released speed 13 press 2 d press speed maintained faster Forward button aandb Reverse button _ c and d Example of wiring MT Series control i terminals Lly speed 1 Motor frequency dE PREND 0 LSP Forward 219 press 119 press 0 Reverse 219 press 174 press 0 Do not use this type with 3 wire control Whichever type of operation is selected the max speed is set by High speed HSP see page 40 Note If the reference is switched via rFC see page 120 from any one reference channel to another reference
302. ying power or starting and stopping the drive Before servicing the variable speed drive Disconnect all power Place a NOT TURN ON label on the variable speed drive disconnect Lock the disconnect in the open position Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present before servicing the drive WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge Then follow the DC bus voltage measurement procedure given in the Installation Manual to verify that the DC voltage is less than 45 V The drive LEDs are not accurate indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage Electric shock will result in death or serious injury CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Documentation structure The following MT Series technical documents are available on the CD ROM supplied with the drive Installation Manual This describes how to assemble and connect the drive Programming manual This describes the functions parameters and use of the drive keypads integrated display keypad and graphic display keypad The communication functions are not described in this manual This can be found in the Modbus or other protocol manual Communication Parameters Manual This manual describes The drive parameters with specific information for use via a bus or communicatio

MT Programming Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents